blob: 2c52c047525ccd7ac0ee8714e63e12103331b66f [file] [log] [blame]
Bram Moolenaarbc7aa852005-03-06 23:38:09 +00001*options.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Mar 06
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002
3
4 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar
5
6
7Options *options*
8
91. Setting options |set-option|
102. Automatically setting options |auto-setting|
113. Options summary |option-summary|
12
13For an overview of options see help.txt |option-list|.
14
15Vim has a number of internal variables and switches which can be set to
16achieve special effects. These options come in three forms:
17 boolean can only be on or off *boolean* *toggle*
18 number has a numeric value
19 string has a string value
20
21==============================================================================
221. Setting options *set-option*
23
24 *:se* *:set*
25:se[t] Show all options that differ from their default value.
26
27:se[t] all Show all but terminal options.
28
29:se[t] termcap Show all terminal options. Note that in the GUI the
30 key codes are not shown, because they are generated
31 internally and can't be changed. Changing the terminal
32 codes in the GUI is not useful either...
33
34 *E518* *E519*
35:se[t] {option}? Show value of {option}.
36
37:se[t] {option} Toggle option: set, switch it on.
38 Number option: show value.
39 String option: show value.
40
41:se[t] no{option} Toggle option: Reset, switch it off.
42
43:se[t] {option}! or
44:se[t] inv{option} Toggle option: Invert value. {not in Vi}
45
46 *:set-default* *:set-&* *:set-&vi* *:set-&vim*
47:se[t] {option}& Reset option to its default value. May depend on the
48 current value of 'compatible'. {not in Vi}
49:se[t] {option}&vi Reset option to its Vi default value. {not in Vi}
50:se[t] {option}&vim Reset option to its Vim default value. {not in Vi}
51
52:se[t] all& Set all options, except terminal options, to their
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +000053 default value. The values of 'term', 'lines' and
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000054 'columns' are not changed. {not in Vi}
55
56 *:set-args* *E487* *E521*
57:se[t] {option}={value} or
58:se[t] {option}:{value}
59 Set string or number option to {value}.
60 For numeric options the value can be given in decimal,
61 hex (preceded with 0x) or octal (preceded with '0')
62 (hex and octal are only available for machines which
63 have the strtol() function).
64 The old value can be inserted by typing 'wildchar' (by
65 default this is a <Tab> or CTRL-E if 'compatible' is
66 set). See |cmdline-completion|.
67 White space between {option} and '=' is allowed and
68 will be ignored. White space between '=' and {value}
69 is not allowed.
70 See |option-backslash| for using white space and
71 backslashes in {value}.
72
73:se[t] {option}+={value} *:set+=*
74 Add the {value} to a number option, or append the
75 {value} to a string option. When the option is a
76 comma separated list, a comma is added, unless the
77 value was empty.
78 If the option is a list of flags, superfluous flags
79 are removed. Otherwise there is no check for doubled
80 values. You can avoid this by removing a value first.
81 Example: >
82 :set guioptions-=T guioptions+=T
83< Also see |:set-args| above.
84 {not in Vi}
85
86:se[t] {option}^={value} *:set^=*
87 Multiply the {value} to a number option, or prepend
88 the {value} to a string option. When the option is a
89 comma separated list, a comma is added, unless the
90 value was empty.
91 Also see |:set-args| above.
92 {not in Vi}
93
94:se[t] {option}-={value} *:set-=*
95 Subtract the {value} from a number option, or remove
96 the {value} from a string option, if it is there.
97 If the {value} is not found in a string option, there
98 is no error or warning. When the option is a comma
99 separated list, a comma is deleted, unless the option
100 becomes empty.
101 When the option is a list of flags, {value} must be
102 exactly as they appear in the option. Remove flags
103 one by one to avoid problems.
104 Also see |:set-args| above.
105 {not in Vi}
106
107The {option} arguments to ":set" may be repeated. For example: >
108 :set ai nosi sw=3 ts=3
109If you make an error in one of the arguments, an error message will be given
110and the following arguments will be ignored.
111
112 *:set-verbose*
113When 'verbose' is non-zero, displaying an option value will also tell where it
114was last set. Example: >
115 :verbose set shiftwidth cindent?
116 shiftwidth=4
117 Last set from modeline
118 cindent
119 Last set from /usr/local/share/vim/vim60/ftplugin/c.vim
120This is only done when specific option values are requested, not for ":set
121all" or ":set" without an argument.
122When the option was set by hand there is no "Last set" message. There is only
123one value for all local options with the same name. Thus the message applies
124to the option name, not necessarily its value.
125When the option was set while executing a function, user command or
126autocommand, the script in which it was defined is reported.
127Note that an option may also have been set as a side effect of setting
128'compatible'.
129{not available when compiled without the +eval feature}
130
131 *:set-termcap* *E522*
132For {option} the form "t_xx" may be used to set a termcap option. This will
133override the value from the termcap. You can then use it in a mapping. If
134the "xx" part contains special characters, use the <t_xx> form: >
135 :set <t_#4>=^[Ot
136This can also be used to translate a special code for a normal key. For
137example, if Alt-b produces <Esc>b, use this: >
138 :set <M-b>=^[b
139(the ^[ is a real <Esc> here, use CTRL-V <Esc> to enter it)
140The advantage over a mapping is that it works in all situations.
141
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +0000142The t_xx options cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
143security reasons.
144
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000145The listing from ":set" looks different from Vi. Long string options are put
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +0000146at the end of the list. The number of options is quite large. The output of
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000147"set all" probably does not fit on the screen, causing Vim to give the
148|more-prompt|.
149
150 *option-backslash*
151To include white space in a string option value it has to be preceded with a
152backslash. To include a backslash you have to use two. Effectively this
153means that the number of backslashes in an option value is halved (rounded
154down).
155A few examples: >
156 :set tags=tags\ /usr/tags results in "tags /usr/tags"
157 :set tags=tags\\,file results in "tags\,file"
158 :set tags=tags\\\ file results in "tags\ file"
159
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +0000160The "|" character separates a ":set" command from a following command. To
161include the "|" in the option value, use "\|" instead. This example sets the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000162'titlestring' option to "hi|there": >
163 :set titlestring=hi\|there
164This sets the 'titlestring' option to "hi" and 'iconstring' to "there": >
165 :set titlestring=hi|set iconstring=there
166
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +0000167For MS-DOS and WIN32 backslashes in file names are mostly not removed. More
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000168precise: For options that expect a file name (those where environment
169variables are expanded) a backslash before a normal file name character is not
170removed. But a backslash before a special character (space, backslash, comma,
171etc.) is used like explained above.
172There is one special situation, when the value starts with "\\": >
173 :set dir=\\machine\path results in "\\machine\path"
174 :set dir=\\\\machine\\path results in "\\machine\path"
175 :set dir=\\path\\file results in "\\path\file" (wrong!)
176For the first one the start is kept, but for the second one the backslashes
177are halved. This makes sure it works both when you expect backslashes to be
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +0000178halved and when you expect the backslashes to be kept. The third gives a
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000179result which is probably not what you want. Avoid it.
180
181 *add-option-flags* *remove-option-flags*
182 *E539* *E550* *E551* *E552*
183Some options are a list of flags. When you want to add a flag to such an
184option, without changing the existing ones, you can do it like this: >
185 :set guioptions+=a
186Remove a flag from an option like this: >
187 :set guioptions-=a
188This removes the 'a' flag from 'guioptions'.
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +0000189Note that you should add or remove one flag at a time. If 'guioptions' has
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000190the value "ab", using "set guioptions-=ba" won't work, because the string "ba"
191doesn't appear.
192
193 *:set_env* *expand-env* *expand-environment-var*
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +0000194Environment variables in specific string options will be expanded. If the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000195environment variable exists the '$' and the following environment variable
196name is replaced with its value. If it does not exist the '$' and the name
197are not modified. Any non-id character (not a letter, digit or '_') may
198follow the environment variable name. That character and what follows is
199appended to the value of the environment variable. Examples: >
200 :set term=$TERM.new
201 :set path=/usr/$INCLUDE,$HOME/include,.
202When adding or removing a string from an option with ":set opt-=val" or ":set
203opt+=val" the expansion is done before the adding or removing.
204
205
206Handling of local options *local-options*
207
208Some of the options only apply to a window or buffer. Each window or buffer
209has its own copy of this option, thus can each have their own value. This
210allows you to set 'list' in one window but not in another. And set
211'shiftwidth' to 3 in one buffer and 4 in another.
212
213The following explains what happens to these local options in specific
214situations. You don't really need to know all of this, since Vim mostly uses
215the option values you would expect. Unfortunately, doing what the user
216expects is a bit complicated...
217
218When splitting a window, the local options are copied to the new window. Thus
219right after the split the contents of the two windows look the same.
220
221When editing a new buffer, its local option values must be initialized. Since
222the local options of the current buffer might be specifically for that buffer,
223these are not used. Instead, for each buffer-local option there also is a
224global value, which is used for new buffers. With ":set" both the local and
225global value is changed. With "setlocal" only the local value is changed,
226thus this value is not used when editing a new buffer.
227
228When editing a buffer that has been edited before, the last used window
229options are used again. If this buffer has been edited in this window, the
230values from back then are used. Otherwise the values from the window where
231the buffer was edited last are used.
232
233It's possible to set a local window option specifically for a type of buffer.
234When you edit another buffer in the same window, you don't want to keep
235using these local window options. Therefore Vim keeps a global value of the
236local window options, which is used when editing another buffer. Each window
237has its own copy of these values. Thus these are local to the window, but
238global to all buffers in the window. With this you can do: >
239 :e one
240 :set list
241 :e two
242Now the 'list' option will also be set in "two", since with the ":set list"
243command you have also set the global value. >
244 :set nolist
245 :e one
246 :setlocal list
247 :e two
248Now the 'list' option is not set, because ":set nolist" resets the global
249value, ":setlocal list" only changes the local value and ":e two" gets the
250global value. Note that if you do this next: >
251 :e one
252You will not get back the 'list' value as it was the last time you edited
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +0000253"one". The options local to a window are not remembered for each buffer.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000254
255 *:setl* *:setlocal*
256:setl[ocal] ... Like ":set" but set only the value local to the
257 current buffer or window. Not all options have a
258 local value. If the option does not have a local
259 value the global value is set.
260 With the "all" argument: display all local option's
261 local values.
262 Without argument: Display all local option's local
263 values which are different from the default.
264 When displaying a specific local option, show the
265 local value. For a global option the global value is
266 shown (but that might change in the future).
267 {not in Vi}
268
269:setl[ocal] {option}< Set the local value of {option} to its global value.
270 {not in Vi}
271
272 *:setg* *:setglobal*
273:setg[lobal] ... Like ":set" but set only the global value for a local
274 option without changing the local value.
275 When displaying an option, the global value is shown.
276 With the "all" argument: display all local option's
277 global values.
278 Without argument: display all local option's global
279 values which are different from the default.
280 {not in Vi}
281
282For buffer-local and window-local options:
283 Command global value local value ~
284 :set option=value set set
285 :setlocal option=value - set
286:setglobal option=value set -
287 :set option? - display
288 :setlocal option? - display
289:setglobal option? display -
290
291
292Global options with a local value *global-local*
293
Bram Moolenaarb5bf5b82004-12-24 14:35:23 +0000294Options are global when you mostly use one value for all buffers and windows.
295For some global options it's useful to sometimes have a different local value.
296You can set the local value with ":setlocal". That buffer or window will then
297use the local value, while other buffers and windows continue using the global
298value.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000299
300For example, you have two windows, both on C source code. They use the global
301'makeprg' option. If you do this in one of the two windows: >
302 :set makeprg=gmake
303then the other window will switch to the same value. There is no need to set
304the 'makeprg' option in the other C source window too.
305However, if you start editing a Perl file in a new window, you want to use
306another 'makeprog' for it, without changing the value used for the C source
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +0000307files. You use this command: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000308 :setlocal makeprg=perlmake
309You can switch back to using the global value by making the local value empty: >
310 :setlocal makeprg=
311This only works for a string option. For a boolean option you need to use the
312"<" flag, like this: >
313 :setlocal autoread<
314Note that for non-boolean options using "<" copies the global value to the
315local value, it doesn't switch back to using the global value (that matters
316when changing the global value later).
317Note: In the future more global options can be made global-local. Using
318":setlocal" on a global option might work differently then.
319
320
321Setting the filetype
322
323:setf[iletype] {filetype} *:setf* *:setfiletype*
324 Set the 'filetype' option to {filetype}, but only if
325 not done yet in a sequence of (nested) autocommands.
326 This is short for: >
327 :if !did_filetype()
328 : setlocal filetype={filetype}
329 :endif
330< This command is used in a filetype.vim file to avoid
331 setting the 'filetype' option twice, causing different
332 settings and syntax files to be loaded.
333 {not in Vi}
334
335:bro[wse] se[t] *:set-browse* *:browse-set* *:opt* *:options*
336:opt[ions] Open a window for viewing and setting all options.
337 Options are grouped by function.
338 Offers short help for each option. Hit <CR> on the
339 short help to open a help window with more help for
340 the option.
341 Modify the value of the option and hit <CR> on the
342 "set" line to set the new value. For window and
343 buffer specific options, the last accessed window is
344 used to set the option value in, unless this is a help
345 window, in which case the window below help window is
346 used (skipping the option-window).
347 {not available when compiled without the |+eval| or
348 |+autocmd| features}
349
350 *$HOME*
351Using "~" is like using "$HOME", but it is only recognized at the start of an
352option and after a space or comma.
353
354On Unix systems "~user" can be used too. It is replaced by the home directory
355of user "user". Example: >
356 :set path=~mool/include,/usr/include,.
357
358On Unix systems the form "${HOME}" can be used too. The name between {} can
359contain non-id characters then. Note that if you want to use this for the
360"gf" command, you need to add the '{' and '}' characters to 'isfname'.
361
362NOTE: expanding environment variables and "~/" is only done with the ":set"
363command, not when assigning a value to an option with ":let".
364
365
366Note the maximum length of an expanded option is limited. How much depends on
367the system, mostly it is something like 256 or 1024 characters.
368
369 *:fix* *:fixdel*
370:fix[del] Set the value of 't_kD':
371 't_kb' is 't_kD' becomes ~
372 CTRL-? CTRL-H
373 not CTRL-? CTRL-?
374
375 (CTRL-? is 0177 octal, 0x7f hex) {not in Vi}
376
377 If your delete key terminal code is wrong, but the
378 code for backspace is alright, you can put this in
379 your .vimrc: >
380 :fixdel
381< This works no matter what the actual code for
382 backspace is.
383
384 If the backspace key terminal code is wrong you can
385 use this: >
386 :if &term == "termname"
387 : set t_kb=^V<BS>
388 : fixdel
389 :endif
390< Where "^V" is CTRL-V and "<BS>" is the backspace key
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +0000391 (don't type four characters!). Replace "termname"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000392 with your terminal name.
393
394 If your <Delete> key sends a strange key sequence (not
395 CTRL-? or CTRL-H) you cannot use ":fixdel". Then use: >
396 :if &term == "termname"
397 : set t_kD=^V<Delete>
398 :endif
399< Where "^V" is CTRL-V and "<Delete>" is the delete key
400 (don't type eight characters!). Replace "termname"
401 with your terminal name.
402
403 *Linux-backspace*
404 Note about Linux: By default the backspace key
405 produces CTRL-?, which is wrong. You can fix it by
406 putting this line in your rc.local: >
407 echo "keycode 14 = BackSpace" | loadkeys
408<
409 *NetBSD-backspace*
410 Note about NetBSD: If your backspace doesn't produce
411 the right code, try this: >
412 xmodmap -e "keycode 22 = BackSpace"
413< If this works, add this in your .Xmodmap file: >
414 keysym 22 = BackSpace
415< You need to restart for this to take effect.
416
417==============================================================================
4182. Automatically setting options *auto-setting*
419
420Besides changing options with the ":set" command, there are three alternatives
421to set options automatically for one or more files:
422
4231. When starting Vim initializations are read from various places. See
424 |initialization|. Most of them are performed for all editing sessions,
425 and some of them depend on the directory where Vim is started.
426 You can create an initialization file with |:mkvimrc|, |:mkview| and
427 |:mksession|.
4282. If you start editing a new file, the automatic commands are executed.
429 This can be used to set options for files matching a particular pattern and
430 many other things. See |autocommand|.
4313. If you start editing a new file, and the 'modeline' option is on, a
432 number of lines at the beginning and end of the file are checked for
433 modelines. This is explained here.
434
435 *modeline* *vim:* *vi:* *ex:* *E520*
436There are two forms of modelines. The first form:
437 [text]{white}{vi:|vim:|ex:}[white]{options}
438
439[text] any text or empty
440{white} at least one blank character (<Space> or <Tab>)
441{vi:|vim:|ex:} the string "vi:", "vim:" or "ex:"
442[white] optional white space
443{options} a list of option settings, separated with white space or ':',
444 where each part between ':' is the argument for a ":set"
445 command
446
447Example: >
448 vi:noai:sw=3 ts=6
449
450The second form (this is compatible with some versions of Vi):
451
452 [text]{white}{vi:|vim:|ex:}[white]se[t] {options}:[text]
453
454[text] any text or empty
455{white} at least one blank character (<Space> or <Tab>)
456{vi:|vim:|ex:} the string "vi:", "vim:" or "ex:"
457[white] optional white space
458se[t] the string "set " or "se " (note the space)
459{options} a list of options, separated with white space, which is the
460 argument for a ":set" command
461: a colon
462[text] any text or empty
463
464Example: >
465 /* vim: set ai tw=75: */
466
467The white space before {vi:|vim:|ex:} is required. This minimizes the chance
468that a normal word like "lex:" is caught. There is one exception: "vi:" and
469"vim:" can also be at the start of the line (for compatibility with version
4703.0). Using "ex:" at the start of the line will be ignored (this could be
471short for "example:").
472
473 *modeline-local*
474The options are set like with ":setlocal": The new value only applies to the
Bram Moolenaar843ee412004-06-30 16:16:41 +0000475buffer and window that contain the file. Although it's possible to set global
476options from a modeline, this is unusual. If you have two windows open and
477the files in it set the same global option to a different value, the result
478depends on which one was opened last.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000479
Bram Moolenaar15d0a8c2004-09-06 17:44:46 +0000480When editing a file that was already loaded, only the window-local options
481from the modeline are used. Thus if you manually changed a buffer-local
482option after opening the file, it won't be changed if you edit the same buffer
483in another window. But window-local options will be set.
484
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000485 *modeline-version*
486If the modeline is only to be used for some versions of Vim, the version
487number can be specified where "vim:" is used:
488 vim{vers}: version {vers} or later
489 vim<{vers}: version before {vers}
490 vim={vers}: version {vers}
491 vim>{vers}: version after {vers}
492{vers} is 600 for Vim 6.0 (hundred times the major version plus minor).
493For example, to use a modeline only for Vim 6.0 and later: >
494 /* vim600: set foldmethod=marker: */
495To use a modeline for Vim before version 5.7: >
496 /* vim<570: set sw=4: */
497There can be no blanks between "vim" and the ":".
498
499
500The number of lines that are checked can be set with the 'modelines' option.
501If 'modeline' is off or 'modelines' is 0 no lines are checked.
502
503Note that for the first form all of the rest of the line is used, thus a line
504like: >
505 /* vi:ts=4: */
506will give an error message for the trailing "*/". This line is OK: >
507 /* vi:set ts=4: */
508
509If an error is detected the rest of the line is skipped.
510
511If you want to include a ':' in a set command precede it with a '\'. The
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +0000512backslash in front of the ':' will be removed. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000513 /* vi:set dir=c\:\tmp: */
514This sets the 'dir' option to "c:\tmp". Only a single backslash before the
515':' is removed. Thus to include "\:" you have to specify "\\:".
516
517No other commands than "set" are supported, for security reasons (somebody
518might create a Trojan horse text file with modelines).
519
520Hint: If you would like to do something else than setting an option, you could
521define an autocommand that checks the file for a specific string. For
522example: >
523 au BufReadPost * if getline(1) =~ "VAR" | call SetVar() | endif
524And define a function SetVar() that does something with the line containing
525"VAR".
526
527==============================================================================
5283. Options summary *option-summary*
529
530In the list below all the options are mentioned with their full name and with
531an abbreviation if there is one. Both forms may be used.
532
533In this document when a boolean option is "set" that means that ":set option"
534is entered. When an option is "reset", ":set nooption" is used.
535
536For some options there are two default values: The "Vim default", which is
537used when 'compatible' is not set, and the "Vi default", which is used when
538'compatible' is set.
539
540Most options are the same in all windows and buffers. There are a few that
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +0000541are specific to how the text is presented in a window. These can be set to a
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000542different value in each window. For example the 'list' option can be set in
543one window and reset in another for the same text, giving both types of view
544at the same time. There are a few options that are specific to a certain
545file. These can have a different value for each file or buffer. For example
546the 'textwidth' option can be 78 for a normal text file and 0 for a C
547program.
548
549 global one option for all buffers and windows
550 local to window each window has its own copy of this option
551 local to buffer each buffer has its own copy of this option
552
553When creating a new window the option values from the currently active window
554are used as a default value for the window-specific options. For the
555buffer-specific options this depends on the 's' and 'S' flags in the
556'cpoptions' option. If 's' is included (which is the default) the values for
557buffer options are copied from the currently active buffer when a buffer is
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +0000558first entered. If 'S' is present the options are copied each time the buffer
559is entered, this is almost like having global options. If 's' and 'S' are not
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000560present, the options are copied from the currently active buffer when the
561buffer is created.
562
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +0000563Not all options are supported in all versions. To test if option "foo" can be
564used with ":set" use "exists('&foo')". This doesn't mean the value is
565actually remembered and works. Some options are hidden, which means that you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000566can set them but the value is not remembered. To test if option "foo" is
567really supported use "exists('+foo')".
568
569 *E355*
570A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
571
572 *'aleph'* *'al'* *aleph* *Aleph*
573'aleph' 'al' number (default 128 for MS-DOS, 224 otherwise)
574 global
575 {not in Vi}
576 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
577 feature}
578 The ASCII code for the first letter of the Hebrew alphabet. The
579 routine that maps the keyboard in Hebrew mode, both in Insert mode
580 (when hkmap is set) and on the command-line (when hitting CTRL-_)
581 outputs the Hebrew characters in the range [aleph..aleph+26].
582 aleph=128 applies to PC code, and aleph=224 applies to ISO 8859-8.
583 See |rileft.txt|.
584
585 *'allowrevins'* *'ari'* *'noallowrevins'* *'noari'*
586'allowrevins' 'ari' boolean (default off)
587 global
588 {not in Vi}
589 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
590 feature}
591 Allow CTRL-_ in Insert and Command-line mode. This is default off, to
592 avoid that users that accidentally type CTRL-_ instead of SHIFT-_ get
593 into reverse Insert mode, and don't know how to get out. See
594 'revins'.
595 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
596
597 *'altkeymap'* *'akm'* *'noaltkeymap'* *'noakm'*
598'altkeymap' 'akm' boolean (default off)
599 global
600 {not in Vi}
601 {only available when compiled with the |+farsi|
602 feature}
603 When on, the second language is Farsi. In editing mode CTRL-_ toggles
604 the keyboard map between Farsi and English, when 'allowrevins' set.
605
606 When off, the keyboard map toggles between Hebrew and English. This
607 is useful to start the Vim in native mode i.e. English (left-to-right
608 mode) and have default second language Farsi or Hebrew (right-to-left
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +0000609 mode). See |farsi.txt|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000610
611 *'ambiwidth'* *'ambw'*
612'ambiwidth' 'ambw' string (default: "single")
613 global
614 {not in Vi}
615 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
616 feature}
617 Only effective when 'encoding' is "utf-8" or another Unicode encoding.
618 Tells Vim what to do with characters with East Asian Width Class
619 Ambiguous (such as Euro, Registered Sign, Copyright Sign, Greek
620 letters, Cyrillic letters).
621
622 There are currently two possible values:
623 "single": Use the same width as characters in US-ASCII. This is
624 expected by most users.
625 "double": Use twice the width of ASCII characters.
626
627 There are a number of CJK fonts for which the width of glyphs for
628 those characters are solely based on how many octets they take in
629 legacy/traditional CJK encodings. In those encodings, Euro,
630 Registered sign, Greek/Cyrillic letters are represented by two octets,
631 therefore those fonts have "wide" glyphs for them. This is also
632 true of some line drawing characters used to make tables in text
633 file. Therefore, when a CJK font is used for GUI Vim or
634 Vim is running inside a terminal (emulators) that uses a CJK font
635 (or Vim is run inside an xterm invoked with "-cjkwidth" option.),
636 this option should be set to "double" to match the width perceived
637 by Vim with the width of glyphs in the font. Perhaps it also has
638 to be set to "double" under CJK Windows 9x/ME or Windows 2k/XP
639 when the system locale is set to one of CJK locales. See Unicode
640 Standard Annex #11 (http://www.unicode.org/reports/tr11).
641
642 *'antialias'* *'anti'* *'noantialias'* *'noanti'*
643'antialias' 'anti' boolean (default: off)
644 global
645 {not in Vi}
646 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled
647 on Mac OS X}
648 This option only has an effect in the GUI version of Vim on Mac OS X
649 v10.2 or later. When on, Vim will use smooth ("antialiased") fonts,
650 which can be easier to read at certain sizes on certain displays.
651 Setting this option can sometimes cause problems if 'guifont' is set
652 to its default (empty string).
653
654 *'autochdir'* *'acd'* *'noautochdir'* *'noacd'*
655'autochdir' 'acd' boolean (default off)
656 global
657 {not in Vi}
658 {only available when compiled with the
659 |+netbeans_intg| or |+sun_workshop| feature}
660 When on, Vim will change its value for the current working directory
661 whenever you open a file, switch buffers, delete a buffer or
662 open/close a window. It will change to the directory containing the
663 file which was opened or selected. This option is provided for
664 backward compatibility with the Vim released with Sun ONE Studio 4
665 Enterprise Edition.
666
667 *'arabic'* *'arab'* *'noarabic'* *'noarab'*
668'arabic' 'arab' boolean (default off)
669 local to window
670 {not in Vi}
671 {only available when compiled with the |+arabic|
672 feature}
673 This option can be set to start editing Arabic text.
674 Setting this option will:
675 - Set the 'rightleft' option, unless 'termbidi' is set.
676 - Set the 'arabicshape' option, unless 'termbidi' is set.
677 - Set the 'keymap' option to "arabic"; in Insert mode CTRL-^ toggles
678 between typing English and Arabic key mapping.
679 - Set the 'delcombine' option
680 Note that 'encoding' must be "utf-8" for working with Arabic text.
681
682 Resetting this option will:
683 - Reset the 'rightleft' option.
684 - Disable the use of 'keymap' (without changing its value).
685 Note that 'arabicshape' and 'delcombine' are not reset (it is a global
686 option.
687 Also see |arabic.txt|.
688
689 *'arabicshape'* *'arshape'*
690 *'noarabicshape'* *'noarshape'*
691'arabicshape' 'arshape' boolean (default on)
692 global
693 {not in Vi}
694 {only available when compiled with the |+arabic|
695 feature}
696 When on and 'termbidi' is off, the required visual character
697 corrections that need to take place for displaying the Arabic language
698 take affect. Shaping, in essence, gets enabled; the term is a broad
699 one which encompasses:
700 a) the changing/morphing of characters based on their location
701 within a word (initial, medial, final and stand-alone).
702 b) the enabling of the ability to compose characters
703 c) the enabling of the required combining of some characters
704 When disabled the character display reverts back to each character's
705 true stand-alone form.
706 Arabic is a complex language which requires other settings, for
707 further details see |arabic.txt|.
708
709 *'autoindent'* *'ai'* *'noautoindent'* *'noai'*
710'autoindent' 'ai' boolean (default off)
711 local to buffer
712 Copy indent from current line when starting a new line (typing <CR>
713 in Insert mode or when using the "o" or "O" command). If you do not
714 type anything on the new line except <BS> or CTRL-D and then type
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +0000715 <Esc> or <CR>, the indent is deleted again. Moving the cursor to
716 another line has the same effect, unless the 'I' flag is included in
717 'cpoptions'.
718 When autoindent is on, formatting (with the "gq" command or when you
719 reach 'textwidth' in Insert mode) uses the indentation of the first
720 line.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000721 When 'smartindent' or 'cindent' is on the indent is changed in
722 a different way.
723 The 'autoindent' option is reset when the 'paste' option is set.
724 {small difference from Vi: After the indent is deleted when typing
725 <Esc> or <CR>, the cursor position when moving up or down is after the
726 deleted indent; Vi puts the cursor somewhere in the deleted indent}.
727
728 *'autoread'* *'ar'* *'noautoread'* *'noar'*
729'autoread' 'ar' boolean (default off)
730 global or local to buffer |global-local|
731 {not in Vi}
732 When a file has been detected to have been changed outside of Vim and
733 it has not been changed inside of Vim, automatically read it again.
734 When the file has been deleted this is not done. |timestamp|
735 If this option has a local value, use this command to switch back to
736 using the global value: >
737 :set autoread<
738<
739 *'autowrite'* *'aw'* *'noautowrite'* *'noaw'*
740'autowrite' 'aw' boolean (default off)
741 global
742 Write the contents of the file, if it has been modified, on each
743 :next, :rewind, :last, :first, :previous, :stop, :suspend, :tag, :!,
744 :make, CTRL-] and CTRL-^ command; and when a CTRL-O, CTRL-I,
745 '{A-Z0-9}, or `{A-Z0-9} command takes one to another file.
746 Note that for some commands the 'autowrite' option is not used, see
747 'autowriteall' for that.
748
749 *'autowriteall'* *'awa'* *'noautowriteall'* *'noawa'*
750'autowriteall' 'awa' boolean (default off)
751 global
752 {not in Vi}
753 Like 'autowrite', but also used for commands ":edit", ":enew", ":quit",
754 ":qall", ":exit", ":xit", ":recover" and closing the Vim window.
755 Setting this option also implies that Vim behaves like 'autowrite' has
756 been set.
757
758 *'background'* *'bg'*
759'background' 'bg' string (default "dark" or "light")
760 global
761 {not in Vi}
762 When set to "dark", Vim will try to use colors that look good on a
763 dark background. When set to "light", Vim will try to use colors that
764 look good on a light background. Any other value is illegal.
765 Vim tries to set the default value according to the terminal used.
766 This will not always be correct.
767 Setting this option does not change the background color, it tells Vim
768 what the background color looks like. For changing the background
769 color, see |:hi-normal|.
770
771 When 'background' is set Vim will adjust the default color groups for
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +0000772 the new value. But the colors used for syntax highlighting will not
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000773 change.
774 When a color scheme is loaded (the "colors_name" variable is set)
775 setting 'background' will cause the color scheme to be reloaded. If
776 the color scheme adjusts to the value of 'background' this will work.
777 However, if the color scheme sets 'background' itself the effect may
778 be undone. First delete the "colors_name" variable when needed.
779
780 When setting 'background' to the default value with: >
781 :set background&
782< Vim will guess the value. In the GUI this should work correctly,
783 in other cases Vim might not be able to guess the right value.
784
785 When starting the GUI, the default value for 'background' will be
786 "light". When the value is not set in the .gvimrc, and Vim detects
787 that the background is actually quite dark, 'background' is set to
788 "dark". But this happens only AFTER the .gvimrc file has been read
789 (because the window needs to be opened to find the actual background
790 color). To get around this, force the GUI window to be opened by
791 putting a ":gui" command in the .gvimrc file, before where the value
792 of 'background' is used (e.g., before ":syntax on").
793 Normally this option would be set in the .vimrc file. Possibly
794 depending on the terminal name. Example: >
795 :if &term == "pcterm"
796 : set background=dark
797 :endif
798< When this option is set, the default settings for the highlight groups
799 will change. To use other settings, place ":highlight" commands AFTER
800 the setting of the 'background' option.
801 This option is also used in the "$VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim" file
802 to select the colors for syntax highlighting. After changing this
803 option, you must load syntax.vim again to see the result. This can be
804 done with ":syntax on".
805
806 *'backspace'* *'bs'*
807'backspace' 'bs' string (default "")
808 global
809 {not in Vi}
810 Influences the working of <BS>, <Del>, CTRL-W and CTRL-U in Insert
811 mode. This is a list of items, separated by commas. Each item allows
812 a way to backspace over something:
813 value effect ~
814 indent allow backspacing over autoindent
815 eol allow backspacing over line breaks (join lines)
816 start allow backspacing over the start of insert; CTRL-W and CTRL-U
817 stop once at the start of insert.
818
819 When the value is empty, Vi compatible backspacing is used.
820
821 For backwards compatibility with version 5.4 and earlier:
822 value effect ~
823 0 same as ":set backspace=" (Vi compatible)
824 1 same as ":set backspace=indent,eol"
825 2 same as ":set backspace=indent,eol,start"
826
827 See |:fixdel| if your <BS> or <Del> key does not do what you want.
828 NOTE: This option is set to "" when 'compatible' is set.
829
830 *'backup'* *'bk'* *'nobackup'* *'nobk'*
831'backup' 'bk' boolean (default off)
832 global
833 {not in Vi}
834 Make a backup before overwriting a file. Leave it around after the
835 file has been successfully written. If you do not want to keep the
836 backup file, but you do want a backup while the file is being
837 written, reset this option and set the 'writebackup' option (this is
838 the default). If you do not want a backup file at all reset both
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +0000839 options (use this if your file system is almost full). See the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000840 |backup-table| for more explanations.
841 When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a backup is not made anyway.
842 When 'patchmode' is set, the backup may be renamed to become the
843 oldest version of a file.
844 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
845
846 *'backupcopy'* *'bkc'*
847'backupcopy' 'bkc' string (Vi default for Unix: "yes", otherwise: "auto")
848 global
849 {not in Vi}
850 When writing a file and a backup is made, this option tells how it's
851 done. This is a comma separated list of words.
852
853 The main values are:
854 "yes" make a copy of the file and overwrite the original one
855 "no" rename the file and write a new one
856 "auto" one of the previous, what works best
857
858 Extra values that can be combined with the ones above are:
859 "breaksymlink" always break symlinks when writing
860 "breakhardlink" always break hardlinks when writing
861
862 Making a copy and overwriting the original file:
863 - Takes extra time to copy the file.
864 + When the file has special attributes, is a (hard/symbolic) link or
865 has a resource fork, all this is preserved.
866 - When the file is a link the backup will have the name of the link,
867 not of the real file.
868
869 Renaming the file and writing a new one:
870 + It's fast.
871 - Sometimes not all attributes of the file can be copied to the new
872 file.
873 - When the file is a link the new file will not be a link.
874
875 The "auto" value is the middle way: When Vim sees that renaming file
876 is possible without side effects (the attributes can be passed on and
877 and the file is not a link) that is used. When problems are expected,
878 a copy will be made.
879
880 The "breaksymlink" and "breakhardlink" values can be used in
881 combination with any of "yes", "no" and "auto". When included, they
882 force Vim to always break either symbolic or hard links by doing
883 exactly what the "no" option does, renaming the original file to
884 become the backup and writing a new file in its place. This can be
885 useful for example in source trees where all the files are symbolic or
886 hard links and any changes should stay in the local source tree, not
887 be propagated back to the original source.
888 *crontab*
889 One situation where "no" and "auto" will cause problems: A program
890 that opens a file, invokes Vim to edit that file, and then tests if
891 the open file was changed (through the file descriptor) will check the
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +0000892 backup file instead of the newly created file. "crontab -e" is an
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000893 example.
894
895 When a copy is made, the original file is truncated and then filled
896 with the new text. This means that protection bits, owner and
897 symbolic links of the original file are unmodified. The backup file
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +0000898 however, is a new file, owned by the user who edited the file. The
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000899 group of the backup is set to the group of the original file. If this
900 fails, the protection bits for the group are made the same as for
901 others.
902
903 When the file is renamed this is the other way around: The backup has
904 the same attributes of the original file, and the newly written file
905 is owned by the current user. When the file was a (hard/symbolic)
906 link, the new file will not! That's why the "auto" value doesn't
907 rename when the file is a link. The owner and group of the newly
908 written file will be set to the same ones as the original file, but
909 the system may refuse to do this. In that case the "auto" value will
910 again not rename the file.
911
912 *'backupdir'* *'bdir'*
913'backupdir' 'bdir' string (default for Amiga: ".,t:",
914 for MS-DOS and Win32: ".,c:/tmp,c:/temp"
915 for Unix: ".,~/tmp,~/")
916 global
917 {not in Vi}
918 List of directories for the backup file, separated with commas.
919 - The backup file will be created in the first directory in the list
920 where this is possible.
921 - Empty means that no backup file will be created ('patchmode' is
922 impossible!). Writing may fail because of this.
923 - A directory "." means to put the backup file in the same directory
924 as the edited file.
Bram Moolenaar009b2592004-10-24 19:18:58 +0000925 - A directory starting with "./" (or ".\" for MS-DOS et al.) means to
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000926 put the backup file relative to where the edited file is. The
927 leading "." is replaced with the path name of the edited file.
928 ("." inside a directory name has no special meaning).
929 - Spaces after the comma are ignored, other spaces are considered part
930 of the directory name. To have a space at the start of a directory
931 name, precede it with a backslash.
932 - To include a comma in a directory name precede it with a backslash.
933 - A directory name may end in an '/'.
934 - Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
935 - Careful with '\' characters, type one before a space, type two to
936 get one in the option (see |option-backslash|), for example: >
937 :set bdir=c:\\tmp,\ dir\\,with\\,commas,\\\ dir\ with\ spaces
938< - For backwards compatibility with Vim version 3.0 a '>' at the start
939 of the option is removed.
940 See also 'backup' and 'writebackup' options.
941 If you want to hide your backup files on Unix, consider this value: >
942 :set backupdir=./.backup,~/.backup,.,/tmp
943< You must create a ".backup" directory in each directory and in your
944 home directory for this to work properly.
945 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
946 directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version
947 uses another default.
948 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
949 security reasons.
950
951 *'backupext'* *'bex'* *E589*
952'backupext' 'bex' string (default "~", for VMS: "_")
953 global
954 {not in Vi}
955 String which is appended to a file name to make the name of the
956 backup file. The default is quite unusual, because this avoids
957 accidentally overwriting existing files with a backup file. You might
958 prefer using ".bak", but make sure that you don't have files with
959 ".bak" that you want to keep.
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +0000960 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000961
Bram Moolenaar3fdfa4a2004-10-07 21:02:47 +0000962 If you like to keep a lot of backups, you could use a BufWritePre
963 autocommand to change 'backupext' just before writing the file to
964 include a timestamp. >
965 :au BufWritePre * let &bex = '-' . strftime("%Y%b%d%X") . '~'
966< Use 'backupdir' to put the backup in a different directory.
967
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000968 *'backupskip'* *'bsk'*
969'backupskip' 'bsk' string (default: "/tmp/*,$TMPDIR/*,$TMP/*,$TEMP/*")
970 global
971 {not in Vi}
972 {not available when compiled without the |+wildignore|
973 feature}
974 A list of file patterns. When one of the patterns matches with the
975 name of the file which is written, no backup file is created. Both
976 the specified file name and the full path name of the file are used.
977 The pattern is used like with |:autocmd|, see |autocmd-patterns|.
978 Watch out for special characters, see |option-backslash|.
979 When $TMPDIR, $TMP or $TEMP is not defined, it is not used for the
980 default value. "/tmp/*" is only used for Unix.
981
982 *'balloondelay'* *'bdlay'*
983'balloondelay' 'bdlay' number (default: 600)
984 global
985 {not in Vi}
986 {only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval|
987 feature}
988 Delay in milliseconds before a balloon may pop up. See |balloon-eval|.
989
990 *'ballooneval'* *'beval'* *'noballooneval'* *'nobeval'*
991'ballooneval' 'beval' boolean (default off)
992 global
993 {not in Vi}
994 {only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval|
995 and |+sun_workshop| or |+netbeans_intg| features}
996 Switch on the |balloon-eval| functionality.
997
998 *'binary'* *'bin'* *'nobinary'* *'nobin'*
999'binary' 'bin' boolean (default off)
1000 local to buffer
1001 {not in Vi}
1002 This option should be set before editing a binary file. You can also
1003 use the |-b| Vim argument. When this option is switched on a few
1004 options will be changed (also when it already was on):
1005 'textwidth' will be set to 0
1006 'wrapmargin' will be set to 0
1007 'modeline' will be off
1008 'expandtab' will be off
1009 Also, 'fileformat' and 'fileformats' options will not be used, the
1010 file is read and written like 'fileformat' was "unix" (a single <NL>
1011 separates lines).
1012 The 'fileencoding' and 'fileencodings' options will not be used, the
1013 file is read without conversion.
1014 NOTE: When you start editing a(nother) file while the 'bin' option is
1015 on, settings from autocommands may change the settings again (e.g.,
1016 'textwidth'), causing trouble when editing. You might want to set
1017 'bin' again when the file has been loaded.
1018 The previous values of these options are remembered and restored when
1019 'bin' is switched from on to off. Each buffer has its own set of
1020 saved option values.
1021 To edit a file with 'binary' set you can use the |++bin| argument.
1022 This avoids you have to do ":set bin", which would have effect for all
1023 files you edit.
1024 When writing a file the <EOL> for the last line is only written if
1025 there was one in the original file (normally Vim appends an <EOL> to
1026 the last line if there is none; this would make the file longer). See
1027 the 'endofline' option.
1028
1029 *'bioskey'* *'biosk'* *'nobioskey'* *'nobiosk'*
1030'bioskey' 'biosk' boolean (default on)
1031 global
1032 {not in Vi} {only for MS-DOS}
1033 When on the bios is called to obtain a keyboard character. This works
1034 better to detect CTRL-C, but only works for the console. When using a
1035 terminal over a serial port reset this option.
1036 Also see |'conskey'|.
1037
1038 *'bomb'* *'nobomb'*
1039'bomb' boolean (default off)
1040 local to buffer
1041 {not in Vi}
1042 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
1043 feature}
1044 When writing a file and the following conditions are met, a BOM (Byte
1045 Order Mark) is prepended to the file:
1046 - this option is on
1047 - the 'binary' option is off
1048 - 'fileencoding' is "utf-8", "ucs-2", "ucs-4" or one of the little/big
1049 endian variants.
1050 Some applications use the BOM to recognize the encoding of the file.
1051 Often used for UCS-2 files on MS-Windows. For other applications it
1052 causes trouble, for example: "cat file1 file2" makes the BOM of file2
1053 appear halfway the resulting file.
1054 When Vim reads a file and 'fileencodings' starts with "ucs-bom", a
1055 check for the presence of the BOM is done and 'bomb' set accordingly.
1056 Unless 'binary' is set, it is removed from the first line, so that you
1057 don't see it when editing. When you don't change the options, the BOM
1058 will be restored when writing the file.
1059
1060 *'breakat'* *'brk'*
1061'breakat' 'brk' string (default " ^I!@*-+;:,./?")
1062 global
1063 {not in Vi}
1064 {not available when compiled without the |+linebreak|
1065 feature}
1066 This option lets you choose which characters might cause a line
1067 break if 'linebreak' is on.
1068
1069 *'browsedir'* *'bsdir'*
Bram Moolenaar7b0294c2004-10-11 10:16:09 +00001070'browsedir' 'bsdir' string (default: "last")
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001071 global
1072 {not in Vi} {only for Motif and Win32 GUI}
1073 Which directory to use for the file browser:
1074 last Use same directory as with last file browser.
1075 buffer Use the directory of the related buffer.
1076 current Use the current directory.
1077 {path} Use the specified directory
1078
1079 *'bufhidden'* *'bh'*
1080'bufhidden' 'bh' string (default: "")
1081 local to buffer
1082 {not in Vi}
1083 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
1084 feature}
1085 This option specifies what happens when a buffer is no longer
1086 displayed in a window:
1087 <empty> follow the global 'hidden' option
1088 hide hide the buffer (don't unload it), also when 'hidden'
1089 is not set
1090 unload unload the buffer, also when 'hidden' is set or using
1091 |:hide|
1092 delete delete the buffer from the buffer list, also when
1093 'hidden' is set or using |:hide|, like using
1094 |:bdelete|
1095 wipe wipe out the buffer from the buffer list, also when
1096 'hidden' is set or using |:hide|, like using
1097 |:bwipeout|
1098
Bram Moolenaara14de3d2005-01-07 21:48:26 +00001099 CAREFUL: when "unload", "delete" or "wipe" is used changes in a buffer
1100 are lost without a warning.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001101 This option is used together with 'buftype' and 'swapfile' to specify
1102 special kinds of buffers. See |special-buffers|.
1103
1104 *'buflisted'* *'bl'* *'nobuflisted'* *'nobl'* *E85*
1105'buflisted' 'bl' boolean (default: on)
1106 local to buffer
1107 {not in Vi}
1108 When this option is set, the buffer shows up in the buffer list. If
1109 it is reset it is not used for ":bnext", "ls", the Buffers menu, etc.
1110 This option is reset by Vim for buffers that are only used to remember
1111 a file name or marks. Vim sets it when starting to edit a buffer.
1112 But not when moving to a buffer with ":buffer".
1113
1114 *'buftype'* *'bt'* *E382*
1115'buftype' 'bt' string (default: "")
1116 local to buffer
1117 {not in Vi}
1118 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
1119 feature}
1120 The value of this option specifies the type of a buffer:
1121 <empty> normal buffer
1122 nofile buffer which is not related to a file and will not be
1123 written
1124 nowrite buffer which will not be written
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001125 acwrite buffer which will always be written with BufWriteCmd
1126 autocommands. {not available when compiled without the
1127 |+autocmd| feature}
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001128 quickfix quickfix buffer, contains list of errors |:cwindow|
1129 help help buffer (you are not supposed to set this
1130 manually)
1131
1132 This option is used together with 'bufhidden' and 'swapfile' to
1133 specify special kinds of buffers. See |special-buffers|.
1134
1135 Be careful with changing this option, it can have many side effects!
1136
1137 A "quickfix" buffer is only used for the error list. This value is
1138 set by the |:cwindow| command and you are not supposed to change it.
1139
1140 "nofile" and "nowrite" buffers are similar:
1141 both: The buffer is not to be written to disk, ":w" doesn't
1142 work (":w filename" does work though).
1143 both: The buffer is never considered to be |'modified'|.
1144 There is no warning when the changes will be lost, for
1145 example when you quit Vim.
1146 both: A swap file is only created when using too much memory
1147 (when 'swapfile' has been reset there is never a swap
1148 file).
1149 nofile only: The buffer name is fixed, it is not handled like a
1150 file name. It is not modified in response to a |:cd|
1151 command.
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001152 *E676*
1153 "acwrite" implies that the buffer name is not related to a file, like
1154 "nofile", but it will be written. Thus, in contrast to "nofile" and
1155 "nowrite", ":w" does work and a modified buffer can't be abandoned
1156 without saving. For writing there must be matching |BufWriteCmd|,
1157 |FileWriteCmd| or |FileAppendCmd| autocommands.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001158
1159 *'casemap'* *'cmp'*
1160'casemap' 'cmp' string (default: "internal,keepascii")
1161 global
1162 {not in Vi}
1163 Specifies details about changing the case of letters. It may contain
1164 these words, separated by a comma:
1165 internal Use internal case mapping functions, the current
1166 locale does not change the case mapping. This only
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00001167 matters when 'encoding' is a Unicode encoding. When
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001168 "internal" is omitted, the towupper() and towlower()
1169 system library functions are used when available.
1170 keepascii For the ASCII characters (0x00 to 0x7f) use the US
1171 case mapping, the current locale is not effective.
1172 This probably only matters for Turkish.
1173
1174 *'cdpath'* *'cd'* *E344* *E346*
1175'cdpath' 'cd' string (default: equivalent to $CDPATH or ",,")
1176 global
1177 {not in Vi}
1178 {not available when compiled without the
1179 |+file_in_path| feature}
1180 This is a list of directories which will be searched when using the
1181 |:cd| and |:lcd| commands, provided that the directory being searched
1182 for has a relative path (not starting with "/", "./" or "../").
1183 The 'cdpath' option's value has the same form and semantics as
1184 |'path'|. Also see |file-searching|.
1185 The default value is taken from $CDPATH, with a "," prepended to look
1186 in the current directory first.
1187 If the default value taken from $CDPATH is not what you want, include
1188 a modified version of the following command in your vimrc file to
1189 override it: >
1190 :let &cdpath = ',' . substitute(substitute($CDPATH, '[, ]', '\\\0', 'g'), ':', ',', 'g')
1191< This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
1192 security reasons.
1193 (parts of 'cdpath' can be passed to the shell to expand file names).
1194
1195 *'cedit'*
1196'cedit' string (Vi default: "", Vim default: CTRL-F)
1197 global
1198 {not in Vi}
1199 {not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit|
1200 feature}
1201 The key used in Command-line Mode to open the command-line window.
1202 The default is CTRL-F when 'compatible' is off.
1203 Only non-printable keys are allowed.
1204 The key can be specified as a single character, but it is difficult to
1205 type. The preferred way is to use the <> notation. Examples: >
1206 :set cedit=<C-Y>
1207 :set cedit=<Esc>
1208< |Nvi| also has this option, but it only uses the first character.
1209 See |cmdwin|.
1210
1211 *'charconvert'* *'ccv'* *E202* *E214* *E513*
1212'charconvert' 'ccv' string (default "")
1213 global
1214 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
1215 feature and the |+eval| feature}
1216 {not in Vi}
1217 An expression that is used for character encoding conversion. It is
1218 evaluated when a file that is to be read or has been written has a
1219 different encoding from what is desired.
1220 'charconvert' is not used when the internal iconv() function is
1221 supported and is able to do the conversion. Using iconv() is
1222 preferred, because it is much faster.
1223 'charconvert' is not used when reading stdin |--|, because there is no
1224 file to convert from. You will have to save the text in a file first.
1225 The expression must return zero or an empty string for success,
1226 non-zero for failure.
1227 The possible encoding names encountered are in 'encoding'.
1228 Additionally, names given in 'fileencodings' and 'fileencoding' are
1229 used.
1230 Conversion between "latin1", "unicode", "ucs-2", "ucs-4" and "utf-8"
1231 is done internally by Vim, 'charconvert' is not used for this.
1232 'charconvert' is also used to convert the viminfo file, if the 'c'
1233 flag is present in 'viminfo'. Also used for Unicode conversion.
1234 Example: >
1235 set charconvert=CharConvert()
1236 fun CharConvert()
1237 system("recode "
1238 \ . v:charconvert_from . ".." . v:charconvert_to
1239 \ . " <" . v:fname_in . " >" v:fname_out)
1240 return v:shell_error
1241 endfun
1242< The related Vim variables are:
1243 v:charconvert_from name of the current encoding
1244 v:charconvert_to name of the desired encoding
1245 v:fname_in name of the input file
1246 v:fname_out name of the output file
1247 Note that v:fname_in and v:fname_out will never be the same.
1248 Note that v:charconvert_from and v:charconvert_to may be different
1249 from 'encoding'. Vim internally uses UTF-8 instead of UCS-2 or UCS-4.
1250 Encryption is not done by Vim when using 'charconvert'. If you want
1251 to encrypt the file after conversion, 'charconvert' should take care
1252 of this.
1253 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
1254 security reasons.
1255
1256 *'cindent'* *'cin'* *'nocindent'* *'nocin'*
1257'cindent' 'cin' boolean (default off)
1258 local to buffer
1259 {not in Vi}
1260 {not available when compiled without the |+cindent|
1261 feature}
1262 Enables automatic C program indenting See 'cinkeys' to set the keys
1263 that trigger reindenting in insert mode and 'cinoptions' to set your
1264 preferred indent style.
1265 If 'indentexpr' is not empty, it overrules 'cindent'.
1266 If 'lisp' is not on and both 'indentexpr' and 'equalprg' are empty,
1267 the "=" operator indents using this algorithm rather than calling an
1268 external program.
1269 See |C-indenting|.
1270 When you don't like the way 'cindent' works, try the 'smartindent'
1271 option or 'indentexpr'.
1272 This option is not used when 'paste' is set.
1273 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
1274
1275 *'cinkeys'* *'cink'*
1276'cinkeys' 'cink' string (default "0{,0},0),:,0#,!^F,o,O,e")
1277 local to buffer
1278 {not in Vi}
1279 {not available when compiled without the |+cindent|
1280 feature}
1281 A list of keys that, when typed in Insert mode, cause reindenting of
1282 the current line. Only used if 'cindent' is on and 'indentexpr' is
1283 empty.
1284 For the format of this option see |cinkeys-format|.
1285 See |C-indenting|.
1286
1287 *'cinoptions'* *'cino'*
1288'cinoptions' 'cino' string (default "")
1289 local to buffer
1290 {not in Vi}
1291 {not available when compiled without the |+cindent|
1292 feature}
1293 The 'cinoptions' affect the way 'cindent' reindents lines in a C
1294 program. See |cinoptions-values| for the values of this option, and
1295 |C-indenting| for info on C indenting in general.
1296
1297
1298 *'cinwords'* *'cinw'*
1299'cinwords' 'cinw' string (default "if,else,while,do,for,switch")
1300 local to buffer
1301 {not in Vi}
1302 {not available when compiled without both the
1303 |+cindent| and the |+smartindent| features}
1304 These keywords start an extra indent in the next line when
1305 'smartindent' or 'cindent' is set. For 'cindent' this is only done at
1306 an appropriate place (inside {}).
1307 Note that 'ignorecase' isn't used for 'cinwords'. If case doesn't
1308 matter, include the keyword both the uppercase and lowercase:
1309 "if,If,IF".
1310
1311 *'clipboard'* *'cb'*
1312'clipboard' 'cb' string (default "autoselect,exclude:cons\|linux"
1313 for X-windows, "" otherwise)
1314 global
1315 {not in Vi}
1316 {only in GUI versions or when the |+xterm_clipboard|
1317 feature is included}
1318 This option is a list of comma separated names.
1319 These names are recognized:
1320
1321 unnamed When included, Vim will use the clipboard register '*'
1322 for all yank, delete, change and put operations which
1323 would normally go to the unnamed register. When a
1324 register is explicitly specified, it will always be
1325 used regardless of whether "unnamed" is in 'clipboard'
1326 or not. The clipboard register can always be
1327 explicitly accessed using the "* notation. Also see
1328 |gui-clipboard|.
1329
1330 autoselect Works like the 'a' flag in 'guioptions': If present,
1331 then whenever Visual mode is started, or the Visual
1332 area extended, Vim tries to become the owner of the
1333 windowing system's global selection or put the
1334 selected text on the clipboard used by the selection
1335 register "*. See |guioptions_a| and |quotestar| for
1336 details. When the GUI is active, the 'a' flag in
1337 'guioptions' is used, when the GUI is not active, this
1338 "autoselect" flag is used.
1339 Also applies to the modeless selection.
1340
1341 autoselectml Like "autoselect", but for the modeless selection
1342 only. Compare to the 'A' flag in 'guioptions'.
1343
1344 exclude:{pattern}
1345 Defines a pattern that is matched against the name of
1346 the terminal 'term'. If there is a match, no
1347 connection will be made to the X server. This is
1348 useful in this situation:
1349 - Running Vim in a console.
1350 - $DISPLAY is set to start applications on another
1351 display.
1352 - You do not want to connect to the X server in the
1353 console, but do want this in a terminal emulator.
1354 To never connect to the X server use: >
1355 exclude:.*
1356< This has the same effect as using the |-X| argument.
1357 Note that when there is no connection to the X server
1358 the window title won't be restored and the clipboard
1359 cannot be accessed.
1360 The value of 'magic' is ignored, {pattern} is
1361 interpreted as if 'magic' was on.
1362 The rest of the option value will be used for
1363 {pattern}, this must be the last entry.
1364
1365 *'cmdheight'* *'ch'*
1366'cmdheight' 'ch' number (default 1)
1367 global
1368 {not in Vi}
1369 Number of screen lines to use for the command-line. Helps avoiding
1370 |hit-enter| prompts.
1371
1372 *'cmdwinheight'* *'cwh'*
1373'cmdwinheight' 'cwh' number (default 7)
1374 global
1375 {not in Vi}
1376 {not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit|
1377 feature}
1378 Number of screen lines to use for the command-line window. |cmdwin|
1379
1380 *'columns'* *'co'* *E594*
1381'columns' 'co' number (default 80 or terminal width)
1382 global
1383 {not in Vi}
1384 Number of columns of the screen. Normally this is set by the terminal
Bram Moolenaar7c626922005-02-07 22:01:03 +00001385 initialization and does not have to be set by hand. Also see
1386 |posix-screen-size|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001387 When Vim is running in the GUI or in a resizable window, setting this
1388 option will cause the window size to be changed. When you only want
1389 to use the size for the GUI, put the command in your |gvimrc| file.
1390 When you set this option and Vim is unable to change the physical
1391 number of columns of the display, the display may be messed up.
1392
1393 *'comments'* *'com'* *E524* *E525*
1394'comments' 'com' string (default
1395 "s1:/*,mb:*,ex:*/,://,b:#,:%,:XCOMM,n:>,fb:-")
1396 local to buffer
1397 {not in Vi}
1398 {not available when compiled without the |+comments|
1399 feature}
1400 A comma separated list of strings that can start a comment line. See
1401 |format-comments|. See |option-backslash| about using backslashes to
1402 insert a space.
1403
1404 *'commentstring'* *'cms'* *E537*
1405'commentstring' 'cms' string (default "/*%s*/")
1406 local to buffer
1407 {not in Vi}
1408 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
1409 feature}
1410 A template for a comment. The "%s" in the value is replaced with the
1411 comment text. Currently only used to add markers for folding, see
1412 |fold-marker|.
1413
1414 *'compatible'* *'cp'* *'nocompatible'* *'nocp'*
1415'compatible' 'cp' boolean (default on, off when a .vimrc file is found)
1416 global
1417 {not in Vi}
1418 This option has the effect of making Vim either more Vi-compatible, or
1419 make Vim behave in a more useful way.
1420 This is a special kind of option, because when it's set or reset,
1421 other options are also changed as a side effect. CAREFUL: Setting or
1422 resetting this option can have a lot of unexpected effects: Mappings
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00001423 are interpreted in another way, undo behaves differently, etc. If you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001424 set this option in your vimrc file, you should probably put it at the
1425 very start.
1426 By default this option is on and the Vi defaults are used for the
1427 options. This default was chosen for those people who want to use Vim
1428 just like Vi, and don't even (want to) know about the 'compatible'
1429 option.
1430 When a ".vimrc" file is found while Vim is starting up, this option is
1431 switched off, and all options that have not been modified will be set
1432 to the Vim defaults. Effectively, this means that when a ".vimrc"
1433 file exists, Vim will use the Vim defaults, otherwise it will use the
1434 Vi defaults. (Note: This doesn't happen for the system-wide vimrc
Bram Moolenaar7c626922005-02-07 22:01:03 +00001435 file). Also see |compatible-default| and |posix-compliance|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001436 You can also set this option with the "-C" argument, and reset it with
1437 "-N". See |-C| and |-N|.
1438 Switching this option off makes the Vim defaults be used for options
1439 that have a different Vi and Vim default value. See the options
1440 marked with a '+' below. Other options are not modified.
1441 At the moment this option is set, several other options will be set
1442 or reset to make Vim as Vi-compatible as possible. See the table
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00001443 below. This can be used if you want to revert to Vi compatible
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001444 editing.
1445 See also 'cpoptions'.
1446
1447 option + set value effect ~
1448
1449 'allowrevins' off no CTRL-_ command
1450 'backupcopy' Unix: "yes" backup file is a copy
1451 others: "auto" copy or rename backup file
1452 'backspace' "" normal backspace
1453 'backup' off no backup file
1454 'cindent' off no C code indentation
1455 'cedit' + "" no key to open the |cmdwin|
1456 'cpoptions' + (all flags) Vi-compatible flags
1457 'cscopetag' off don't use cscope for ":tag"
1458 'cscopetagorder' 0 see |cscopetagorder|
1459 'cscopeverbose' off see |cscopeverbose|
1460 'digraph' off no digraphs
1461 'esckeys' + off no <Esc>-keys in Insert mode
1462 'expandtab' off tabs not expanded to spaces
1463 'fileformats' + "" no automatic file format detection,
1464 "dos,unix" except for DOS, Windows and OS/2
1465 'formatoptions' + "vt" Vi compatible formatting
1466 'gdefault' off no default 'g' flag for ":s"
1467 'history' + 0 no commandline history
1468 'hkmap' off no Hebrew keyboard mapping
1469 'hkmapp' off no phonetic Hebrew keyboard mapping
1470 'hlsearch' off no highlighting of search matches
1471 'incsearch' off no incremental searching
1472 'indentexpr' "" no indenting by expression
1473 'insertmode' off do not start in Insert mode
1474 'iskeyword' + "@,48-57,_" keywords contain alphanumeric
1475 characters and '_'
1476 'joinspaces' on insert 2 spaces after period
1477 'modeline' + off no modelines
1478 'more' + off no pauses in listings
1479 'revins' off no reverse insert
1480 'ruler' off no ruler
1481 'scrolljump' 1 no jump scroll
1482 'scrolloff' 0 no scroll offset
1483 'shiftround' off indent not rounded to shiftwidth
1484 'shortmess' + "" no shortening of messages
1485 'showcmd' + off command characters not shown
1486 'showmode' + off current mode not shown
1487 'smartcase' off no automatic ignore case switch
1488 'smartindent' off no smart indentation
1489 'smarttab' off no smart tab size
1490 'softtabstop' 0 tabs are always 'tabstop' positions
1491 'startofline' on goto startofline with some commands
1492 'tagrelative' + off tag file names are not relative
1493 'textauto' + off no automatic textmode detection
1494 'textwidth' 0 no automatic line wrap
1495 'tildeop' off tilde is not an operator
1496 'ttimeout' off no terminal timeout
1497 'whichwrap' + "" left-right movements don't wrap
1498 'wildchar' + CTRL-E only when the current value is <Tab>
1499 use CTRL-E for cmdline completion
1500 'writebackup' on or off depends on +writebackup feature
1501
1502 *'complete'* *'cpt'* *E535*
1503'complete' 'cpt' string (default: ".,w,b,u,t,i")
1504 local to buffer
1505 {not in Vi}
1506 This option specifies how keyword completion |ins-completion| works
1507 when CTRL-P or CTRL-N are used. It is also used for whole-line
1508 completion |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-L|. It indicates the type of completion
1509 and the places to scan. It is a comma separated list of flags:
1510 . scan the current buffer ('wrapscan' is ignored)
1511 w scan buffers from other windows
1512 b scan other loaded buffers that are in the buffer list
1513 u scan the unloaded buffers that are in the buffer list
1514 U scan the buffers that are not in the buffer list
1515 k scan the files given with the 'dictionary' option
1516 k{dict} scan the file {dict}. Several "k" flags can be given,
1517 patterns are valid too. For example: >
1518 :set cpt=k/usr/dict/*,k~/spanish
1519< s scan the files given with the 'thesaurus' option
1520 s{tsr} scan the file {tsr}. Several "s" flags can be given, patterns
1521 are valid too.
1522 i scan current and included files
1523 d scan current and included files for defined name or macro
1524 |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-D|
1525 ] tag completion
1526 t same as "]"
1527
1528 Unloaded buffers are not loaded, thus their autocmds |:autocmd| are
1529 not executed, this may lead to unexpected completions from some files
1530 (gzipped files for example). Unloaded buffers are not scanned for
1531 whole-line completion.
1532
1533 The default is ".,w,b,u,t,i", which means to scan:
1534 1. the current buffer
1535 2. buffers in other windows
1536 3. other loaded buffers
1537 4. unloaded buffers
1538 5. tags
1539 6. included files
1540
1541 As you can see, CTRL-N and CTRL-P can be used to do any 'iskeyword'-
1542 based expansion (eg dictionary |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K|, included patterns
1543 |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-I|, tags |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-]| and normal expansions)
1544
Bram Moolenaarcfbc5ee2004-07-02 15:38:35 +00001545 *'completefunc'* *'cfu'*
1546'completefunc' 'cfu' string (default: empty)
1547 local to buffer
1548 {not in Vi}
1549 This option specifies a completion function to be used for CTRL-X
1550 CTRL-X. The function will be invoked with four arguments:
1551 a:line the text of the current line
1552 a:base the text with which matches should match
1553 a:col column in a:line where the cursor is, first column is
1554 zero
1555 a:findstart either 1 or 0
1556 When the a:findstart argument is 1, the function must return the
1557 column of where the completion starts. It must be a number between
1558 zero and "a:col". This involves looking at the characters in a:line
1559 before column a:col and include those characters that could be part of
1560 the completed item.
1561 When the a:findstart argument is 0 the function must return a string
1562 with the matching words, separated by newlines. When there are no
1563 matches return an empty string.
1564 An example that completes the names of the months: >
1565 fun! CompleteMonths(line, base, col, findstart)
1566 if a:findstart
1567 " locate start column of word
1568 let start = a:col
1569 while start > 0 && a:line[start - 1] =~ '\a'
1570 let start = start - 1
1571 endwhile
1572 return start
1573 else
1574 " find months matching with "a:base"
1575 let res = "Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec"
1576 if a:base != ''
1577 let res = substitute(res, '\c\<\(\(' . a:base . '.\{-}\>\)\|.\{-}\>\)', '\2', 'g')
1578 endif
1579 let res = substitute(res, ' \+', "\n", 'g')
1580 return res
1581 endif
1582 endfun
1583 set completefunc=CompleteMonths
1584< Note that a substitute() function is used to reduce the list of
1585 possible values and remove the ones that don't match the base. The
1586 part before the "\|" matches the base, the part after it is used
1587 when there is no match. The "\2" in the replacement is empty if the
1588 part before the "\|" does not match.
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00001589
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001590 *'confirm'* *'cf'* *'noconfirm'* *'nocf'*
1591'confirm' 'cf' boolean (default off)
1592 global
1593 {not in Vi}
1594 When 'confirm' is on, certain operations that would normally
1595 fail because of unsaved changes to a buffer, e.g. ":q" and ":e",
1596 instead raise a |dialog| asking if you wish to save the current
1597 file(s). You can still use a ! to unconditionally |abandon| a buffer.
1598 If 'confirm' is off you can still activate confirmation for one
1599 command only (this is most useful in mappings) with the |:confirm|
1600 command.
1601 Also see the |confirm()| function and the 'v' flag in 'guioptions'.
1602
1603 *'conskey'* *'consk'* *'noconskey'* *'noconsk'*
1604'conskey' 'consk' boolean (default off)
1605 global
1606 {not in Vi} {only for MS-DOS}
1607 When on direct console I/O is used to obtain a keyboard character.
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00001608 This should work in most cases. Also see |'bioskey'|. Together,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001609 three methods of console input are available:
1610 'conskey' 'bioskey' action ~
1611 on on or off direct console input
1612 off on BIOS
1613 off off STDIN
1614
1615 *'copyindent'* *'ci'* *'nocopyindent'* *'noci'*
1616'copyindent' 'ci' boolean (default off)
1617 local to buffer
1618 {not in Vi}
1619 Copy the structure of the existing lines indent when autoindenting a
1620 new line. Normally the new indent is reconstructed by a series of
1621 tabs followed by spaces as required (unless |'expandtab'| is enabled,
1622 in which case only spaces are used). Enabling this option makes the
1623 new line copy whatever characters were used for indenting on the
1624 existing line. If the new indent is greater than on the existing
1625 line, the remaining space is filled in the normal manner.
1626 NOTE: 'copyindent' is reset when 'compatible' is set.
1627 Also see 'preserveindent'.
1628
1629 *'cpoptions'* *'cpo'*
1630'cpoptions' 'cpo' string (Vim default: "aABceFs",
1631 Vi default: all flags)
1632 global
1633 {not in Vi}
1634 A sequence of single character flags. When a character is present
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00001635 this indicates vi-compatible behavior. This is used for things where
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001636 not being vi-compatible is mostly or sometimes preferred.
1637 'cpoptions' stands for "compatible-options".
1638 Commas can be added for readability.
1639 To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the
1640 "+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|.
1641 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
1642 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
Bram Moolenaar4399ef42005-02-12 14:29:27 +00001643 NOTE: This option is set to the POSIX default value at startup when
1644 the Vi default value would be used and the $VIM_POSIX environment
1645 variable exists |posix|. This means tries to behave like the POSIX
1646 specification.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001647
1648 contains behavior ~
1649 *cpo-a*
1650 a When included, a ":read" command with a file name
1651 argument will set the alternate file name for the
1652 current window.
1653 *cpo-A*
1654 A When included, a ":write" command with a file name
1655 argument will set the alternate file name for the
1656 current window.
1657 *cpo-b*
1658 b "\|" in a ":map" command is recognized as the end of
1659 the map command. The '\' is included in the mapping,
1660 the text after the '|' is interpreted as the next
1661 command. Use a CTRL-V instead of a backslash to
1662 include the '|' in the mapping. Applies to all
1663 mapping, abbreviation, menu and autocmd commands.
1664 See also |map_bar|.
1665 *cpo-B*
1666 B A backslash has no special meaning in mappings,
1667 abbreviations and the "to" part of the menu commands.
1668 Remove this flag to be able to use a backslash like a
1669 CTRL-V. For example, the command ":map X \<Esc>"
1670 results in X being mapped to:
1671 'B' included: "\^[" (^[ is a real <Esc>)
1672 'B' excluded: "<Esc>" (5 characters)
1673 ('<' excluded in both cases)
1674 *cpo-c*
1675 c Searching continues at the end of any match at the
1676 cursor position, but not further than the start of the
1677 next line. When not present searching continues
1678 one character from the cursor position. With 'c'
1679 "abababababab" only gets three matches when repeating
1680 "/abab", without 'c' there are five matches.
1681 *cpo-C*
1682 C Do not concatenate sourced lines that start with a
1683 backslash. See |line-continuation|.
1684 *cpo-d*
1685 d Using "./" in the 'tags' option doesn't mean to use
1686 the tags file relative to the current file, but the
1687 tags file in the current directory.
1688 *cpo-D*
1689 D Can't use CTRL-K to enter a digraph after Normal mode
1690 commands with a character argument, like |r|, |f| and
1691 |t|.
1692 *cpo-e*
1693 e When executing a register with ":@r", always add a
1694 <CR> to the last line, also when the register is not
1695 linewise. If this flag is not present, the register
1696 is not linewise and the last line does not end in a
1697 <CR>, then the last line is put on the command-line
1698 and can be edited before hitting <CR>.
1699 *cpo-E*
1700 E It is an error when using "y", "d", "c", "g~", "gu" or
1701 "gU" on an Empty region. The operators only work when
1702 at least one character is to be operate on. Example:
1703 This makes "y0" fail in the first column.
1704 *cpo-f*
1705 f When included, a ":read" command with a file name
1706 argument will set the file name for the current buffer,
1707 if the current buffer doesn't have a file name yet.
1708 *cpo-F*
1709 F When included, a ":write" command with a file name
1710 argument will set the file name for the current
1711 buffer, if the current buffer doesn't have a file name
1712 yet.
1713 *cpo-g*
1714 g Goto line 1 when using ":edit" without argument.
Bram Moolenaar4399ef42005-02-12 14:29:27 +00001715 *cpo-H*
1716 H When using "I" on a line with only blanks, insert
1717 before the last blank. Without this flag insert after
1718 the last blank.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001719 *cpo-i*
1720 i When included, interrupting the reading of a file will
1721 leave it modified.
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00001722 *cpo-I*
1723 I When moving the cursor up or down just after inserting
1724 indent for 'autoindent', do not delete the indent.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001725 *cpo-j*
1726 j When joining lines, only add two spaces after a '.',
1727 not after '!' or '?'. Also see 'joinspaces'.
1728 *cpo-J*
1729 J A |sentence| has to be followed by two spaces after
1730 the '.', '!' or '?'. A <Tab> is not recognized as
1731 white space.
1732 *cpo-k*
1733 k Disable the recognition of raw key codes in
1734 mappings, abbreviations, and the "to" part of menu
1735 commands. For example, if <Key> sends ^[OA (where ^[
1736 is <Esc>), the command ":map X ^[OA" results in X
1737 being mapped to:
1738 'k' included: "^[OA" (3 characters)
1739 'k' excluded: "<Key>" (one key code)
1740 Also see the '<' flag below.
1741 *cpo-K*
1742 K Don't wait for a key code to complete when it is
1743 halfway a mapping. This breaks mapping <F1><F1> when
1744 only part of the second <F1> has been read. It
1745 enables cancelling the mapping by typing <F1><Esc>.
1746 *cpo-l*
1747 l Backslash in a [] range in a search pattern is taken
Bram Moolenaar26a60b42005-02-22 08:49:11 +00001748 literally, only "\]", "\^", "\-" and "\\" are special.
1749 See |/[]|
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001750 'l' included: "/[ \t]" finds <Space>, '\' and 't'
1751 'l' excluded: "/[ \t]" finds <Space> and <Tab>
Bram Moolenaar26a60b42005-02-22 08:49:11 +00001752 Also see |cpo-\|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001753 *cpo-L*
1754 L When the 'list' option is set, 'wrapmargin',
1755 'textwidth', 'softtabstop' and Virtual Replace mode
1756 (see |gR|) count a <Tab> as two characters, instead of
1757 the normal behavior of a <Tab>.
1758 *cpo-m*
1759 m When included, a showmatch will always wait half a
1760 second. When not included, a showmatch will wait half
1761 a second or until a character is typed. |'showmatch'|
1762 *cpo-M*
1763 M When excluded, "%" matching will take backslashes into
1764 account. Thus in "( \( )" and "\( ( \)" the outer
1765 parenthesis match. When included "%" ignores
1766 backslashes, which is Vi compatible.
1767 *cpo-n*
1768 n When included, the column used for 'number' will also
1769 be used for text of wrapped lines.
1770 *cpo-o*
1771 o Line offset to search command is not remembered for
1772 next search.
1773 *cpo-O*
1774 O Don't complain if a file is being overwritten, even
1775 when it didn't exist when editing it. This is a
1776 protection against a file unexpectedly created by
1777 someone else. Vi didn't complain about this.
1778 *cpo-p*
1779 p Vi compatible Lisp indenting. When not present, a
1780 slightly better algorithm is used.
Bram Moolenaar4399ef42005-02-12 14:29:27 +00001781 *cpo-q*
1782 q When joining multiple lines leave the cursor at the
1783 position where it would be when joining two lines.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001784 *cpo-r*
1785 r Redo ("." command) uses "/" to repeat a search
1786 command, instead of the actually used search string.
1787 *cpo-R*
1788 R Remove marks from filtered lines. Without this flag
1789 marks are kept like |:keepmarks| was used.
1790 *cpo-s*
1791 s Set buffer options when entering the buffer for the
1792 first time. This is like it is in Vim version 3.0.
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00001793 And it is the default. If not present the options are
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001794 set when the buffer is created.
1795 *cpo-S*
1796 S Set buffer options always when entering a buffer
1797 (except 'readonly', 'fileformat', 'filetype' and
1798 'syntax'). This is the (most) Vi compatible setting.
1799 The options are set to the values in the current
1800 buffer. When you change an option and go to another
1801 buffer, the value is copied. Effectively makes the
1802 buffer options global to all buffers.
1803
1804 's' 'S' copy buffer options
1805 no no when buffer created
1806 yes no when buffer first entered (default)
1807 X yes each time when buffer entered (vi comp.)
1808 *cpo-t*
1809 t Search pattern for the tag command is remembered for
1810 "n" command. Otherwise Vim only puts the pattern in
1811 the history for search pattern, but doesn't change the
1812 last used search pattern.
1813 *cpo-u*
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00001814 u Undo is Vi compatible. See |undo-two-ways|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001815 *cpo-v*
1816 v Backspaced characters remain visible on the screen in
1817 Insert mode. Without this flag the characters are
1818 erased from the screen right away. With this flag the
1819 screen newly typed text overwrites backspaced
1820 characters.
1821 *cpo-w*
1822 w When using "cw" on a blank character, only change one
1823 character and not all blanks until the start of the
1824 next word.
1825 *cpo-W*
1826 W Don't overwrite a readonly file. When omitted, ":w!"
1827 overwrites a readonly file, if possible.
1828 *cpo-x*
1829 x <Esc> on the command-line executes the command-line.
1830 The default in Vim is to abandon the command-line,
1831 because <Esc> normally aborts a command. |c_<Esc>|
Bram Moolenaar4399ef42005-02-12 14:29:27 +00001832 *cpo-X*
1833 X When using a count with "R" the replaced text is
1834 deleted only once. Also when repeating "R" with "."
1835 and a count.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001836 *cpo-y*
1837 y A yank command can be redone with ".".
Bram Moolenaar4399ef42005-02-12 14:29:27 +00001838 *cpo-Z*
1839 Z When using "w!" while the 'readonly' option is set,
1840 don't reset 'readonly'.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001841 *cpo-!*
1842 ! When redoing a filter command, use the last used
1843 external command, whatever it was. Otherwise the last
1844 used -filter- command is used.
1845 *cpo-$*
1846 $ When making a change to one line, don't redisplay the
1847 line, but put a '$' at the end of the changed text.
1848 The changed text will be overwritten when you type the
1849 new text. The line is redisplayed if you type any
1850 command that moves the cursor from the insertion
1851 point.
1852 *cpo-%*
1853 % Vi-compatible matching is done for the "%" command.
1854 Does not recognize "#if", "#endif", etc.
1855 Does not recognize "/*" and "*/".
1856 Parens inside single and double quotes are also
1857 counted, causing a string that contains a paren to
1858 disturb the matching. For example, in a line like
1859 "if (strcmp("foo(", s))" the first paren does not
1860 match the last one. When this flag is not included,
1861 parens inside single and double quotes are treated
1862 specially. When matching a paren outside of quotes,
1863 everything inside quotes is ignored. When matching a
1864 paren inside quotes, it will find the matching one (if
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00001865 there is one). This works very well for C programs.
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +00001866 This flag is also used for other features, such as
1867 C-indenting.
Bram Moolenaar7c626922005-02-07 22:01:03 +00001868 *cpo--*
1869 - When included, a vertical movement command fails when
1870 it would above the first line or below the last line.
1871 Without it the cursor moves to the first or last line,
1872 unless it already was in that line.
1873 Applies to the commands "-", "k", CTRL-P, "+", "j",
1874 CTRL-N and CTRL-J.
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00001875 *cpo-+*
1876 + When included, a ":write file" command will reset the
1877 'modified' flag of the buffer, even though the buffer
1878 itself may still be different from its file.
Bram Moolenaar4399ef42005-02-12 14:29:27 +00001879 *cpo-star*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001880 * Use ":*" in the same way as ":@". When not included,
1881 ":*" is an alias for ":'<,'>", select the Visual area.
1882 *cpo-<*
1883 < Disable the recognition of special key codes in |<>|
1884 form in mappings, abbreviations, and the "to" part of
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00001885 menu commands. For example, the command
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001886 ":map X <Tab>" results in X being mapped to:
1887 '<' included: "<Tab>" (5 characters)
1888 '<' excluded: "^I" (^I is a real <Tab>)
1889 Also see the 'k' flag above.
Bram Moolenaar4399ef42005-02-12 14:29:27 +00001890 *cpo->*
1891 > When appending to a register, put a line break before
1892 the appended text.
1893
1894 POSIX flags. These are not included in the Vi default value, except
1895 when $VIM_POSIX was set on startup. |posix|
1896
1897 contains behavior ~
1898 *cpo-#*
1899 # A count before "D", "o" and "O" has no effect.
Bram Moolenaar4399ef42005-02-12 14:29:27 +00001900 *cpo-&*
1901 & When ":preserve" was used keep the swap file when
1902 exiting normally while this buffer is still loaded.
1903 This flag is tested when exiting.
Bram Moolenaar26a60b42005-02-22 08:49:11 +00001904 *cpo-\*
1905 \ Backslash in a [] range in a search pattern is taken
1906 literally, only "\]" is special See |/[]|
1907 'l' included: "/[ \t]" finds <Space>, '\' and 't'
1908 'l' excluded: "/[ \t]" finds <Space> and <Tab>
1909 Also see |cpo-\|.
1910 *cpo-/*
1911 / When "%" is used as the replacement string in a |:s|
1912 command, use the previous replacement string. |:s%|
1913 *cpo-{*
1914 { The |{| and |}| commands also stop at a "{" character
1915 at the start of a line.
1916 *cpo-.*
1917 . The ":chdir" and ":cd" commands fail if the current
1918 buffer is modified, unless ! is used. Vim doesn't
1919 need this, since it remembers the full path of an
1920 opened file.
1921 *cpo-bar*
1922 | The value of the $LINES and $COLUMNS environment
1923 variables overrule the terminal size values obtained
1924 with system specific functions.
Bram Moolenaar4399ef42005-02-12 14:29:27 +00001925
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001926
1927 *'cscopepathcomp'* *'cspc'*
1928'cscopepathcomp' 'cspc' number (default 0)
1929 global
1930 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
1931 feature}
1932 {not in Vi}
1933 Determines how many components of the path to show in a list of tags.
1934 See |cscopepathcomp|.
1935
1936 *'cscopeprg'* *'csprg'*
1937'cscopeprg' 'csprg' string (default "cscope")
1938 global
1939 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
1940 feature}
1941 {not in Vi}
1942 Specifies the command to execute cscope. See |cscopeprg|.
1943 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
1944 security reasons.
1945
1946 *'cscopequickfix'* *'csqf'*
1947'cscopequickfix' 'csqf' string (default "")
1948 global
1949 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
1950 or |+quickfix| features}
1951 {not in Vi}
1952 Specifies whether to use quickfix window to show cscope results.
1953 See |cscopequickfix|.
1954
1955 *'cscopetag'* *'cst'* *'nocscopetag'* *'nocst'*
1956'cscopetag' 'cst' boolean (default off)
1957 global
1958 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
1959 feature}
1960 {not in Vi}
1961 Use cscope for tag commands. See |cscope-options|.
1962 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
1963
1964 *'cscopetagorder'* *'csto'*
1965'cscopetagorder' 'csto' number (default 0)
1966 global
1967 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
1968 feature}
1969 {not in Vi}
1970 Determines the order in which ":cstag" performs a search. See
1971 |cscopetagorder|.
1972 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set.
1973
1974 *'cscopeverbose'* *'csverb'*
1975 *'nocscopeverbose'* *'nocsverb'*
1976'cscopeverbose' 'csverb' boolean (default off)
1977 global
1978 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
1979 feature}
1980 {not in Vi}
1981 Give messages when adding a cscope database. See |cscopeverbose|.
1982 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
1983
1984 *'debug'*
1985'debug' string (default "")
1986 global
1987 {not in Vi}
1988 When set to "msg", error messages that would otherwise be omitted will
1989 be given anyway. This is useful when debugging 'foldexpr' or
1990 'indentexpr'.
Bram Moolenaar26a60b42005-02-22 08:49:11 +00001991 When set to "beep", a message will be given when otherwise only a beep
1992 would be produced.
1993 The values can be combined, separated by a comma.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001994
1995 *'define'* *'def'*
1996'define' 'def' string (default "^\s*#\s*define")
1997 global or local to buffer |global-local|
1998 {not in Vi}
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00001999 Pattern to be used to find a macro definition. It is a search
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002000 pattern, just like for the "/" command. This option is used for the
2001 commands like "[i" and "[d" |include-search|. The 'isident' option is
2002 used to recognize the defined name after the match:
2003 {match with 'define'}{non-ID chars}{defined name}{non-ID char}
2004 See |option-backslash| about inserting backslashes to include a space
2005 or backslash.
2006 The default value is for C programs. For C++ this value would be
2007 useful, to include const type declarations: >
2008 ^\(#\s*define\|[a-z]*\s*const\s*[a-z]*\)
2009< When using the ":set" command, you need to double the backslashes!
2010
2011 *'delcombine'* *'deco'* *'nodelcombine'* *'nodeco'*
2012'delcombine' 'deco' boolean (default off)
2013 global
2014 {not in Vi}
2015 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
2016 feature}
2017 If editing Unicode and this option is set, backspace and Normal mode
2018 "x" delete each combining character on its own. When it is off (the
2019 default) the character along with its combining characters are
2020 deleted.
2021 Note: When 'delcombine' is set "xx" may work different from "2x"!
2022
2023 This is useful for Arabic, Hebrew and many other languages where one
2024 may have combining characters overtop of base characters, and want
2025 to remove only the combining ones.
2026
2027 *'dictionary'* *'dict'*
2028'dictionary' 'dict' string (default "")
2029 global or local to buffer |global-local|
2030 {not in Vi}
2031 List of file names, separated by commas, that are used to lookup words
2032 for keyword completion commands |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K|. Each file should
2033 contain a list of words. This can be one word per line, or several
2034 words per line, separated by non-keyword characters (white space is
2035 preferred). Maximum line length is 510 bytes.
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002036 To include a comma in a file name precede it with a backslash. Spaces
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002037 after a comma are ignored, otherwise spaces are included in the file
2038 name. See |option-backslash| about using backslashes.
Bram Moolenaard8b02732005-01-14 21:48:43 +00002039 This has nothing to do with the |Dictionary| variable type.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002040 Where to find a list of words?
2041 - On FreeBSD, there is the file "/usr/share/dict/words".
2042 - In the Simtel archive, look in the "msdos/linguist" directory.
2043 - In "miscfiles" of the GNU collection.
2044 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
2045 directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version
2046 uses another default.
2047 Backticks cannot be used in this option for security reasons.
2048
2049 *'diff'* *'nodiff'*
2050'diff' boolean (default off)
2051 local to window
2052 {not in Vi}
2053 {not available when compiled without the |+diff|
2054 feature}
2055 Join the current window in the group of windows that shows differences
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002056 between files. See |vimdiff|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002057
2058 *'dex'* *'diffexpr'*
2059'diffexpr' 'dex' string (default "")
2060 global
2061 {not in Vi}
2062 {not available when compiled without the |+diff|
2063 feature}
2064 Expression which is evaluated to obtain an ed-style diff file from two
2065 versions of a file. See |diff-diffexpr|.
2066 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
2067 security reasons.
2068
2069 *'dip'* *'diffopt'*
2070'diffopt' 'dip' string (default "filler")
2071 global
2072 {not in Vi}
2073 {not available when compiled without the |+diff|
2074 feature}
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002075 Option settings for diff mode. It can consist of the following items.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002076 All are optional. Items must be separated by a comma.
2077
2078 filler Show filler lines, to keep the text
2079 synchronized with a window that has inserted
2080 lines at the same position. Mostly useful
2081 when windows are side-by-side and 'scrollbind'
2082 is set.
2083
2084 context:{n} Use a context of {n} lines between a change
2085 and a fold that contains unchanged lines.
2086 When omitted a context of six lines is used.
2087 See |fold-diff|.
2088
2089 icase Ignore changes in case of text. "a" and "A"
2090 are considered the same. Adds the "-i" flag
2091 to the "diff" command if 'diffexpr' is empty.
2092
2093 iwhite Ignore changes in amount of white space. Adds
2094 the "-b" flag to the "diff" command if
2095 'diffexpr' is empty. Check the documentation
2096 of the "diff" command for what this does
2097 exactly. It should ignore adding trailing
2098 white space, but not leading white space.
2099
2100 Examples: >
2101
2102 :set diffopt=filler,context:4
2103 :set diffopt=
2104 :set diffopt=filler
2105<
2106 *'digraph'* *'dg'* *'nodigraph'* *'nodg'*
2107'digraph' 'dg' boolean (default off)
2108 global
2109 {not in Vi}
2110 {not available when compiled without the |+digraphs|
2111 feature}
2112 Enable the entering of digraphs in Insert mode with {char1} <BS>
2113 {char2}. See |digraphs|.
2114 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
2115
2116 *'directory'* *'dir'*
2117'directory' 'dir' string (default for Amiga: ".,t:",
2118 for MS-DOS and Win32: ".,c:\tmp,c:\temp"
2119 for Unix: ".,~/tmp,/var/tmp,/tmp")
2120 global
2121 List of directory names for the swap file, separated with commas.
2122 - The swap file will be created in the first directory where this is
2123 possible.
2124 - Empty means that no swap file will be used (recovery is
2125 impossible!).
2126 - A directory "." means to put the swap file in the same directory as
2127 the edited file. On Unix, a dot is prepended to the file name, so
2128 it doesn't show in a directory listing. On MS-Windows the "hidden"
2129 attribute is set and a dot prepended if possible.
Bram Moolenaar009b2592004-10-24 19:18:58 +00002130 - A directory starting with "./" (or ".\" for MS-DOS et al.) means to
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002131 put the swap file relative to where the edited file is. The leading
2132 "." is replaced with the path name of the edited file.
2133 - For Unix and Win32, if a directory ends in two path separators, the
2134 swap file name will be built from the complete path to the file
2135 with all path separators substituted to percent '%' signs. This will
2136 ensure file name uniqueness in the preserve directory.
2137 - Spaces after the comma are ignored, other spaces are considered part
2138 of the directory name. To have a space at the start of a directory
2139 name, precede it with a backslash.
2140 - To include a comma in a directory name precede it with a backslash.
2141 - A directory name may end in an ':' or '/'.
2142 - Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
2143 - Careful with '\' characters, type one before a space, type two to
2144 get one in the option (see |option-backslash|), for example: >
2145 :set dir=c:\\tmp,\ dir\\,with\\,commas,\\\ dir\ with\ spaces
2146< - For backwards compatibility with Vim version 3.0 a '>' at the start
2147 of the option is removed.
2148 Using "." first in the list is recommended. This means that editing
2149 the same file twice will result in a warning. Using "/tmp" on Unix is
2150 discouraged: When the system crashes you lose the swap file.
2151 "/var/tmp" is often not cleared when rebooting, thus is a better
2152 choice than "/tmp". But it can contain a lot of files, your swap
2153 files get lost in the crowd. That is why a "tmp" directory in your
2154 home directory is tried first.
2155 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
2156 directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version
2157 uses another default.
2158 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
2159 security reasons.
2160 {Vi: directory to put temp file in, defaults to "/tmp"}
2161
2162 *'display'* *'dy'*
2163'display' 'dy' string (default "")
2164 global
2165 {not in Vi}
2166 Change the way text is displayed. This is comma separated list of
2167 flags:
2168 lastline When included, as much as possible of the last line
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002169 in a window will be displayed. When not included, a
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002170 last line that doesn't fit is replaced with "@" lines.
2171 uhex Show unprintable characters hexadecimal as <xx>
2172 instead of using ^C and ~C.
2173
2174 *'eadirection'* *'ead'*
2175'eadirection' 'ead' string (default "both")
2176 global
2177 {not in Vi}
2178 {not available when compiled without the +vertsplit
2179 feature}
2180 Tells when the 'equalalways' option applies:
2181 ver vertically, width of windows is not affected
2182 hor horizontally, height of windows is not affected
2183 both width and height of windows is affected
2184
2185 *'ed'* *'edcompatible'* *'noed'* *'noedcompatible'*
2186'edcompatible' 'ed' boolean (default off)
2187 global
2188 Makes the 'g' and 'c' flags of the ":substitute" command to be
2189 toggled each time the flag is given. See |complex-change|. See
2190 also 'gdefault' option.
2191 Switching this option on is discouraged!
2192
2193 *'encoding'* *'enc'* *E543*
2194'encoding' 'enc' string (default: "latin1" or value from $LANG)
2195 global
2196 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
2197 feature}
2198 {not in Vi}
2199 Sets the character encoding used inside Vim. It applies to text in
2200 the buffers, registers, Strings in expressions, text stored in the
2201 viminfo file, etc. It sets the kind of characters which Vim can work
2202 with. See |encoding-names| for the possible values.
2203
2204 NOTE: Changing this option will not change the encoding of the
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00002205 existing text in Vim. It may cause non-ASCII text to become invalid.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002206 It should normally be kept at its default value, or set when Vim
2207 starts up. See |multibyte|.
2208
2209 NOTE: For GTK+ 2 it is highly recommended to set 'encoding' to
2210 "utf-8". Although care has been taken to allow different values of
2211 'encoding', "utf-8" is the natural choice for the environment and
2212 avoids unnecessary conversion overhead. "utf-8" has not been made
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002213 the default to prevent different behavior of the GUI and terminal
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002214 versions, and to avoid changing the encoding of newly created files
2215 without your knowledge (in case 'fileencodings' is empty).
2216
2217 The character encoding of files can be different from 'encoding'.
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002218 This is specified with 'fileencoding'. The conversion is done with
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002219 iconv() or as specified with 'charconvert'.
2220
2221 Normally 'encoding' will be equal to your current locale. This will
2222 be the default if Vim recognizes your environment settings. If
2223 'encoding' is not set to the current locale, 'termencoding' must be
2224 set to convert typed and displayed text. See |encoding-table|.
2225
2226 When you set this option, it fires the |EncodingChanged| autocommand
2227 event so that you can set up fonts if necessary.
2228
2229 When the option is set, the value is converted to lowercase. Thus
2230 you can set it with uppercase values too. Underscores are translated
2231 to '-' signs.
2232 When the encoding is recognized, it is changed to the standard name.
2233 For example "Latin-1" becomes "latin1", "ISO_88592" becomes
2234 "iso-8859-2" and "utf8" becomes "utf-8".
2235
2236 Note: "latin1" is also used when the encoding could not be detected.
2237 This only works when editing files in the same encoding! When the
2238 actual character set is not latin1, make sure 'fileencoding' and
2239 'fileencodings' are empty. When conversion is needed, switch to using
2240 utf-8.
2241
2242 When "unicode", "ucs-2" or "ucs-4" is used, Vim internally uses utf-8.
2243 You don't notice this while editing, but it does matter for the
2244 |viminfo-file|. And Vim expects the terminal to use utf-8 too. Thus
2245 setting 'encoding' to one of these values instead of utf-8 only has
2246 effect for encoding used for files when 'fileencoding' is empty.
2247
2248 When 'encoding' is set to a Unicode encoding, and 'fileencodings' was
2249 not set yet, the default for 'fileencodings' is changed.
2250
2251 *'endofline'* *'eol'* *'noendofline'* *'noeol'*
2252'endofline' 'eol' boolean (default on)
2253 local to buffer
2254 {not in Vi}
2255 When writing a file and this option is off and the 'binary' option
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002256 is on, no <EOL> will be written for the last line in the file. This
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002257 option is automatically set when starting to edit a new file, unless
2258 the file does not have an <EOL> for the last line in the file, in
2259 which case it is reset. Normally you don't have to set or reset this
2260 option. When 'binary' is off the value is not used when writing the
2261 file. When 'binary' is on it is used to remember the presence of a
2262 <EOL> for the last line in the file, so that when you write the file
2263 the situation from the original file can be kept. But you can change
2264 it if you want to.
2265
2266 *'equalalways'* *'ea'* *'noequalalways'* *'noea'*
2267'equalalways' 'ea' boolean (default on)
2268 global
2269 {not in Vi}
2270 When on, all the windows are automatically made the same size after
Bram Moolenaar009b2592004-10-24 19:18:58 +00002271 splitting or closing a window. This also happens the moment the
2272 option is switched on. When off, splitting a window will reduce the
2273 size of the current window and leave the other windows the same. When
2274 closing a window the extra lines are given to the window next to it
2275 (depending on 'splitbelow' and 'splitright').
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002276 When mixing vertically and horizontally split windows, a minimal size
2277 is computed and some windows may be larger if there is room. The
2278 'eadirection' option tells in which direction the size is affected.
2279 Changing the height of a window can be avoided by setting
2280 'winfixheight'.
2281
2282 *'equalprg'* *'ep'*
2283'equalprg' 'ep' string (default "")
2284 global or local to buffer |global-local|
2285 {not in Vi}
2286 External program to use for "=" command. When this option is empty
2287 the internal formatting functions are used ('lisp', 'cindent' or
2288 'indentexpr').
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002289 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. See |option-backslash|
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002290 about including spaces and backslashes.
2291 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
2292 security reasons.
2293
2294 *'errorbells'* *'eb'* *'noerrorbells'* *'noeb'*
2295'errorbells' 'eb' boolean (default off)
2296 global
2297 Ring the bell (beep or screen flash) for error messages. This only
2298 makes a difference for error messages, the bell will be used always
2299 for a lot of errors without a message (e.g., hitting <Esc> in Normal
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002300 mode). See 'visualbell' on how to make the bell behave like a beep,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002301 screen flash or do nothing.
2302
2303 *'errorfile'* *'ef'*
2304'errorfile' 'ef' string (Amiga default: "AztecC.Err",
2305 others: "errors.err")
2306 global
2307 {not in Vi}
2308 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
2309 feature}
2310 Name of the errorfile for the QuickFix mode (see |:cf|).
2311 When the "-q" command-line argument is used, 'errorfile' is set to the
2312 following argument. See |-q|.
2313 NOT used for the ":make" command. See 'makeef' for that.
2314 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
2315 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
2316 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
2317 security reasons.
2318
2319 *'errorformat'* *'efm'*
2320'errorformat' 'efm' string (default is very long)
2321 global or local to buffer |global-local|
2322 {not in Vi}
2323 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
2324 feature}
2325 Scanf-like description of the format for the lines in the error file
2326 (see |errorformat|).
2327
2328 *'esckeys'* *'ek'* *'noesckeys'* *'noek'*
2329'esckeys' 'ek' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
2330 global
2331 {not in Vi}
2332 Function keys that start with an <Esc> are recognized in Insert
2333 mode. When this option is off, the cursor and function keys cannot be
2334 used in Insert mode if they start with an <Esc>. The advantage of
2335 this is that the single <Esc> is recognized immediately, instead of
2336 after one second. Instead of resetting this option, you might want to
2337 try changing the values for 'timeoutlen' and 'ttimeoutlen'. Note that
2338 when 'esckeys' is off, you can still map anything, but the cursor keys
2339 won't work by default.
2340 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
2341 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
2342
2343 *'eventignore'* *'ei'*
2344'eventignore' 'ei' string (default "")
2345 global
2346 {not in Vi}
2347 {not available when compiled without the |+autocmd|
2348 feature}
2349 A list of autocommand event names, which are to be ignored.
2350 When set to "all", all autocommand events are ignored, autocommands
2351 will not be executed.
2352 Otherwise this is a comma separated list of event names. Example: >
2353 :set ei=WinEnter,WinLeave
2354<
2355 *'expandtab'* *'et'* *'noexpandtab'* *'noet'*
2356'expandtab' 'et' boolean (default off)
2357 local to buffer
2358 {not in Vi}
2359 In Insert mode: Use the appropriate number of spaces to insert a
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002360 <Tab>. Spaces are used in indents with the '>' and '<' commands and
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002361 when 'autoindent' is on. To insert a real tab when 'expandtab' is
2362 on, use CTRL-V<Tab>. See also |:retab| and |ins-expandtab|.
2363 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
2364
2365 *'exrc'* *'ex'* *'noexrc'* *'noex'*
2366'exrc' 'ex' boolean (default off)
2367 global
2368 {not in Vi}
2369 Enables the reading of .vimrc, .exrc and .gvimrc in the current
2370 directory. If you switch this option on you should also consider
2371 setting the 'secure' option (see |initialization|). Using a local
2372 .exrc, .vimrc or .gvimrc is a potential security leak, use with care!
2373 also see |.vimrc| and |gui-init|.
2374 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
2375 security reasons.
2376
2377 *'fileencoding'* *'fenc'* *E213*
2378'fileencoding' 'fenc' string (default: "")
2379 local to buffer
2380 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
2381 feature}
2382 {not in Vi}
2383 Sets the character encoding for the file of this buffer.
2384 When 'fileencoding' is different from 'encoding', conversion will be
2385 done when reading and writing the file.
2386 When 'fileencoding' is empty, the same value as 'encoding' will be
2387 used (no conversion when reading or writing a file).
2388 WARNING: Conversion can cause loss of information! When
2389 'encoding' is "utf-8" conversion is most likely done in a way
2390 that the reverse conversion results in the same text. When
2391 'encoding' is not "utf-8" some characters may be lost!
2392 See 'encoding' for the possible values. Additionally, values may be
2393 specified that can be handled by the converter, see
2394 |mbyte-conversion|.
2395 When reading a file 'fileencoding' will be set from 'fileencodings'.
2396 To read a file in a certain encoding it won't work by setting
2397 'fileencoding', use the |++enc| argument.
2398 Prepending "8bit-" and "2byte-" has no meaning here, they are ignored.
2399 When the option is set, the value is converted to lowercase. Thus
2400 you can set it with uppercase values too. '_' characters are
2401 replaced with '-'. If a name is recognized from the list for
2402 'encoding', it is replaced by the standard name. For example
2403 "ISO8859-2" becomes "iso-8859-2".
2404 When this option is set, after starting to edit a file, the 'modified'
2405 option is set, because the file would be different when written.
2406 If you do this in a modeline, you might want to set 'nomodified' to
2407 avoid this.
2408 This option can not be changed when 'modifiable' is off.
2409
2410 *'fe'*
2411 NOTE: Before version 6.0 this option specified the encoding for the
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002412 whole of Vim, this was a mistake. Now use 'encoding' instead. The
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002413 old short name was 'fe', which is no longer used.
2414
2415 *'fileencodings'* *'fencs'*
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00002416'fileencodings' 'fencs' string (default: "ucs-bom",
2417 "ucs-bom,utf-8,default,latin1" when
2418 'encoding' is set to a Unicode value)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002419 global
2420 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
2421 feature}
2422 {not in Vi}
2423 This is a list of character encodings considered when starting to edit
2424 an existing file. When a file is read, Vim tries to use the first
2425 mentioned character encoding. If an error is detected, the next one
2426 in the list is tried. When an encoding is found that works,
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002427 'fileencoding' is set to it. If all fail, 'fileencoding' is set to
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002428 an empty string, which means the value of 'encoding' is used.
2429 WARNING: Conversion can cause loss of information! When
2430 'encoding' is "utf-8" (or one of the other Unicode variants)
2431 conversion is most likely done in a way that the reverse
2432 conversion results in the same text. When 'encoding' is not
2433 "utf-8" special characters may be lost!
2434 For an empty file or a file with only ASCII characters most encodings
2435 will work and the first entry of 'fileencodings' will be used (except
2436 "ucs-bom", which requires the BOM to be present). If you prefer
2437 another encoding use an BufReadPost autocommand event to test if your
2438 preferred encoding is to be used. Example: >
2439 au BufReadPost * if search('\S', 'w') == 0 |
2440 \ set fenc=iso-2022-jp | endif
2441< This sets 'fileencoding' to "iso-2022-jp" if the file does not contain
2442 non-blank characters.
2443 Note that 'fileencodings' is not used for an new file, 'fileencoding'
2444 is always empty then. This means that a non-existing file may get a
2445 different encoding than an empty file.
2446 The special value "ucs-bom" can be used to check for a Unicode BOM
2447 (Byte Order Mark) at the start of the file. It must not be preceded
2448 by "utf-8" or another Unicode encoding for this to work properly.
2449 An entry for an 8-bit encoding (e.g., "latin1") should be the last,
2450 because Vim cannot detect an error, thus the encoding is always
2451 accepted.
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00002452 The special value "default" can be used for the encoding from the
2453 environment. This is the default value for 'encoding'. It is useful
2454 when 'encoding' is set to "utf-8" and your environment uses a
2455 non-latin1 encoding, such as Russian.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002456 WRONG VALUES: WHAT'S WRONG:
2457 latin1,utf-8 "latin1" will always be used
2458 utf-8,ucs-bom,latin1 BOM won't be recognized in an utf-8
2459 file
2460 cp1250,latin1 "cp1250" will always be used
2461 If 'fileencodings' is empty, 'fileencoding' is not modified.
2462 See 'fileencoding' for the possible values.
2463 Setting this option does not have an effect until the next time a file
2464 is read.
2465
2466 *'fileformat'* *'ff'*
2467'fileformat' 'ff' string (MS-DOS, MS-Windows, OS/2 default: "dos",
2468 Unix default: "unix",
2469 Macintosh default: "mac")
2470 local to buffer
2471 {not in Vi}
2472 This gives the <EOL> of the current buffer, which is used for
2473 reading/writing the buffer from/to a file:
2474 dos <CR> <NL>
2475 unix <NL>
2476 mac <CR>
2477 When "dos" is used, CTRL-Z at the end of a file is ignored.
2478 See |file-formats| and |file-read|.
2479 For the character encoding of the file see 'fileencoding'.
2480 When 'binary' is set, the value of 'fileformat' is ignored, file I/O
2481 works like it was set to "unix'.
2482 This option is set automatically when starting to edit a file and
2483 'fileformats' is not empty and 'binary' is off.
2484 When this option is set, after starting to edit a file, the 'modified'
2485 option is set, because the file would be different when written.
2486 This option can not be changed when 'modifiable' is off.
2487 For backwards compatibility: When this option is set to "dos",
2488 'textmode' is set, otherwise 'textmode' is reset.
2489
2490 *'fileformats'* *'ffs'*
2491'fileformats' 'ffs' string (default:
2492 Vim+Vi MS-DOS, MS-Windows OS/2: "dos,unix",
2493 Vim Unix: "unix,dos",
2494 Vim Mac: "mac,unix,dos",
2495 Vi Cygwin: "unix,dos",
2496 Vi others: "")
2497 global
2498 {not in Vi}
2499 This gives the end-of-line (<EOL>) formats that will be tried when
2500 starting to edit a new buffer and when reading a file into an existing
2501 buffer:
2502 - When empty, the format defined with 'fileformat' will be used
2503 always. It is not set automatically.
2504 - When set to one name, that format will be used whenever a new buffer
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002505 is opened. 'fileformat' is set accordingly for that buffer. The
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002506 'fileformats' name will be used when a file is read into an existing
2507 buffer, no matter what 'fileformat' for that buffer is set to.
2508 - When more than one name is present, separated by commas, automatic
2509 <EOL> detection will be done when reading a file. When starting to
2510 edit a file, a check is done for the <EOL>:
2511 1. If all lines end in <CR><NL>, and 'fileformats' includes "dos",
2512 'fileformat' is set to "dos".
2513 2. If a <NL> is found and 'fileformats' includes "unix", 'fileformat'
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002514 is set to "unix". Note that when a <NL> is found without a
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002515 preceding <CR>, "unix" is preferred over "dos".
2516 3. If 'fileformats' includes "mac", 'fileformat' is set to "mac".
2517 This means that "mac" is only chosen when "unix" is not present,
2518 or when no <NL> is found in the file, and when "dos" is not
2519 present, or no <CR><NL> is present in the file.
2520 Also if "unix" was first chosen, but the first <CR> is before
2521 the first <NL> and there appears to be more <CR>'s than <NL>'s in
2522 the file, then 'fileformat' is set to "mac".
2523 4. If 'fileformat' is still not set, the first name from
2524 'fileformats' is used.
2525 When reading a file into an existing buffer, the same is done, but
2526 this happens like 'fileformat' has been set appropriately for that
2527 file only, the option is not changed.
2528 When 'binary' is set, the value of 'fileformats' is not used.
2529
2530 For systems with a Dos-like <EOL> (<CR><NL>), when reading files that
2531 are ":source"ed and for vimrc files, automatic <EOL> detection may be
2532 done:
2533 - When 'fileformats' is empty, there is no automatic detection. Dos
2534 format will be used.
2535 - When 'fileformats' is set to one or more names, automatic detection
2536 is done. This is based on the first <NL> in the file: If there is a
2537 <CR> in front of it, Dos format is used, otherwise Unix format is
2538 used.
2539 Also see |file-formats|.
2540 For backwards compatibility: When this option is set to an empty
2541 string or one format (no comma is included), 'textauto' is reset,
2542 otherwise 'textauto' is set.
2543 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
2544 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
2545
2546 *'filetype'* *'ft'*
2547'filetype' 'ft' string (default: "")
2548 local to buffer
2549 {not in Vi}
2550 {not available when compiled without the |+autocmd|
2551 feature}
2552 When this option is set, the FileType autocommand event is triggered.
2553 All autocommands that match with the value of this option will be
2554 executed. Thus the value of 'filetype' is used in place of the file
2555 name.
2556 Otherwise this option does not always reflect the current file type.
2557 This option is normally set when the file type is detected. To enable
2558 this use the ":filetype on" command. |:filetype|
2559 Setting this option to a different value is most useful in a modeline,
2560 for a file for which the file type is not automatically recognized.
2561 Example, for in an IDL file: >
2562 /* vim: set filetype=idl : */
2563< |FileType| |filetypes|
2564 Do not confuse this option with 'osfiletype', which is for the file
2565 type that is actually stored with the file.
2566 This option is not copied to another buffer, independent of the 's' or
2567 'S' flag in 'cpoptions'.
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +00002568 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002569
2570 *'fillchars'* *'fcs'*
2571'fillchars' 'fcs' string (default "vert:|,fold:-")
2572 global
2573 {not in Vi}
2574 {not available when compiled without the |+windows|
2575 and |+folding| features}
2576 Characters to fill the statuslines and vertical separators.
2577 It is a comma separated list of items:
2578
2579 item default Used for ~
2580 stl:c ' ' or '^' statusline of the current window
2581 stlnc:c ' ' or '-' statusline of the non-current windows
2582 vert:c '|' vertical separators |:vsplit|
2583 fold:c '-' filling 'foldtext'
2584 diff:c '-' deleted lines of the 'diff' option
2585
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002586 Any one that is omitted will fall back to the default. For "stl" and
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002587 "stlnc" the space will be used when there is highlighting, '^' or '-'
2588 otherwise.
2589
2590 Example: >
2591 :set fillchars=stl:^,stlnc:-,vert:\|,fold:-,diff:-
2592< This is similar to the default, except that these characters will also
2593 be used when there is highlighting.
2594
2595 The highlighting used for these items:
2596 item highlight group ~
2597 stl:c StatusLine |hl-StatusLine|
2598 stlnc:c StatusLineNC |hl-StatusLineNC|
2599 vert:c VertSplit |hl-VertSplit|
2600 fold:c Folded |hl-Folded|
2601 diff:c DiffDelete |hl-DiffDelete|
2602
2603 *'fkmap'* *'fk'* *'nofkmap'* *'nofk'*
2604'fkmap' 'fk' boolean (default off) *E198*
2605 global
2606 {not in Vi}
2607 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
2608 feature}
2609 When on, the keyboard is mapped for the Farsi character set.
2610 Normally you would set 'allowrevins' and use CTRL-_ in insert mode to
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002611 toggle this option |i_CTRL-_|. See |farsi.txt|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002612
2613 *'foldclose'* *'fcl'*
2614'foldclose' 'fcl' string (default "")
2615 global
2616 {not in Vi}
2617 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
2618 feature}
2619 When set to "all", a fold is closed when the cursor isn't in it and
2620 its level is higher than 'foldlevel'. Useful if you want folds to
2621 automatically close when moving out of them.
2622
2623 *'foldcolumn'* *'fdc'*
2624'foldcolumn' 'fdc' number (default 0)
2625 local to window
2626 {not in Vi}
2627 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
2628 feature}
2629 When non-zero, a column with the specified width is shown at the side
2630 of the window which indicates open and closed folds. The maximum
2631 value is 12.
2632 See |folding|.
2633
2634 *'foldenable'* *'fen'* *'nofoldenable'* *'nofen'*
2635'foldenable' 'fen' boolean (default on)
2636 local to window
2637 {not in Vi}
2638 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
2639 feature}
2640 When off, all folds are open. This option can be used to quickly
2641 switch between showing all text unfolded and viewing the text with
2642 folds (including manually opened or closed folds). It can be toggled
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002643 with the |zi| command. The 'foldcolumn' will remain blank when
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002644 'foldenable' is off.
2645 This option is set by commands that create a new fold or close a fold.
2646 See |folding|.
2647
2648 *'foldexpr'* *'fde'*
2649'foldexpr' 'fde' string (default: "0")
2650 local to window
2651 {not in Vi}
2652 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
2653 or |+eval| feature}
2654 The expression used for when 'foldmethod' is "expr". It is evaluated
2655 for each line to obtain its fold level. See |fold-expr|. Also see
2656 |eval-sandbox|.
2657
2658 *'foldignore'* *'fdi'*
2659'foldignore' 'fdi' string (default: "#")
2660 local to window
2661 {not in Vi}
2662 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
2663 feature}
2664 Used only when 'foldmethod' is "indent". Lines starting with
2665 characters in 'foldignore' will get their fold level from surrounding
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002666 lines. White space is skipped before checking for this character.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002667 The default "#" works well for C programs. See |fold-indent|.
2668
2669 *'foldlevel'* *'fdl'*
2670'foldlevel' 'fdl' number (default: 0)
2671 local to window
2672 {not in Vi}
2673 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
2674 feature}
2675 Sets the fold level: Folds with a higher level will be closed.
2676 Setting this option to zero will close all folds. Higher numbers will
2677 close fewer folds.
2678 This option is set by commands like |zm|, |zM| and |zR|.
2679 See |fold-foldlevel|.
2680
2681 *'foldlevelstart'* *'fdls'*
2682'foldlevelstart' 'fdls' number (default: -1)
2683 global
2684 {not in Vi}
2685 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
2686 feature}
2687 Sets 'foldlevel' when starting to edit another buffer in a window.
2688 Useful to always start editing with all folds closed (value zero),
2689 some folds closed (one) or no folds closed (99).
2690 This is done before reading any modeline, thus a setting in a modeline
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002691 overrules this option. Starting to edit a file for |diff-mode| also
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002692 ignores this option and closes all folds.
2693 It is also done before BufReadPre autocommands, to allow an autocmd to
2694 overrule the 'foldlevel' value for specific files.
2695 When the value is negative, it is not used.
2696
2697 *'foldmarker'* *'fmr'* *E536*
2698'foldmarker' 'fmr' string (default: "{{{,}}}")
2699 local to window
2700 {not in Vi}
2701 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
2702 feature}
2703 The start and end marker used when 'foldmethod' is "marker". There
2704 must be one comma, which separates the start and end marker. The
2705 marker is a literal string (a regular expression would be too slow).
2706 See |fold-marker|.
2707
2708 *'foldmethod'* *'fdm'*
2709'foldmethod' 'fdm' string (default: "manual")
2710 local to window
2711 {not in Vi}
2712 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
2713 feature}
2714 The kind of folding used for the current window. Possible values:
2715 |fold-manual| manual Folds are created manually.
2716 |fold-indent| indent Lines with equal indent form a fold.
2717 |fold-expr| expr 'foldexpr' gives the fold level of a line.
2718 |fold-marker| marker Markers are used to specify folds.
2719 |fold-syntax| syntax Syntax highlighting items specify folds.
2720 |fold-diff| diff Fold text that is not changed.
2721
2722 *'foldminlines'* *'fml'*
2723'foldminlines' 'fml' number (default: 1)
2724 local to window
2725 {not in Vi}
2726 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
2727 feature}
2728 Sets the minimum number of screen lines for a fold to be displayed
2729 closed. Also for manually closed folds.
2730 Note that this only has an effect of what is displayed. After using
2731 "zc" to close a fold, which is displayed open because it's smaller
2732 than 'foldminlines', a following "zc" may close a containing fold.
2733
2734 *'foldnestmax'* *'fdn'*
2735'foldnestmax' 'fdn' number (default: 20)
2736 local to window
2737 {not in Vi}
2738 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
2739 feature}
2740 Sets the maximum nesting of folds for the "indent" and "syntax"
2741 methods. This avoids that too many folds will be created. Using more
2742 than 20 doesn't work, because the internal limit is 20.
2743
2744 *'foldopen'* *'fdo'*
2745'foldopen' 'fdo' string (default: "block,hor,mark,percent,quickfix,
2746 search,tag,undo")
2747 global
2748 {not in Vi}
2749 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
2750 feature}
2751 Specifies for which type of commands folds will be opened, if the
2752 command moves the cursor into a closed fold. It is a comma separated
2753 list of items.
2754 item commands ~
2755 all any
2756 block "(", "{", "[[", "[{", etc.
2757 hor horizontal movements: "l", "w", "fx", etc.
2758 insert any command in Insert mode
2759 jump far jumps: "G", "gg", etc.
2760 mark jumping to a mark: "'m", CTRL-O, etc.
2761 percent "%"
2762 quickfix ":cn", ":crew", ":make", etc.
2763 search search for a pattern: "/", "n", "*", "gd", etc.
2764 (not for a search pattern in a ":" command)
2765 tag jumping to a tag: ":ta", CTRL-T, etc.
2766 undo undo or redo: "u" and CTRL-R
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002767 When the command is part of a mapping this option is not used. Add
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002768 the |zv| command to the mapping to get the same effect.
2769 When a movement command is used for an operator (e.g., "dl" or "y%")
2770 this option is not used. This means the operator will include the
2771 whole closed fold.
2772 Note that vertical movements are not here, because it would make it
2773 very difficult to move onto a closed fold.
2774 In insert mode the folds containing the cursor will always be open
2775 when text is inserted.
2776 To close folds you can re-apply 'foldlevel' with the |zx| command or
2777 set the 'foldclose' option to "all".
2778
2779 *'foldtext'* *'fdt'*
2780'foldtext' 'fdt' string (default: "foldtext()")
2781 local to window
2782 {not in Vi}
2783 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
2784 feature}
2785 An expression which is used to specify the text displayed for a closed
2786 fold. See |fold-foldtext|.
2787
2788 *'formatoptions'* *'fo'*
2789'formatoptions' 'fo' string (Vim default: "tcq", Vi default: "vt")
2790 local to buffer
2791 {not in Vi}
2792 This is a sequence of letters which describes how automatic
2793 formatting is to be done. See |fo-table|. When the 'paste' option is
2794 on, no formatting is done (like 'formatoptions' is empty). Commas can
2795 be inserted for readability.
2796 To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the
2797 "+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|.
2798 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
2799 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
2800
Bram Moolenaar86b68352004-12-27 21:59:20 +00002801 *'formatlistpat'* *'flp'*
2802'formatlistpat' 'flp' string (default: "^\s*\d\+[\]:.)}\t ]\s*")
2803 local to buffer
2804 {not in Vi}
2805 A pattern that is used to recognize a list header. This is used for
2806 the "n" flag in 'formatoptions'.
2807 The pattern must match exactly the text that will be the indent for
Bram Moolenaar677ee682005-01-27 14:41:15 +00002808 the line below it. You can use |/\ze| to mark the end of the match
Bram Moolenaar86b68352004-12-27 21:59:20 +00002809 while still checking more characters. There must be a character
2810 following the pattern, when it matches the whole line it is handled
2811 like there is no match.
2812 The default recognizes a number, followed by an optional punctuation
2813 character and white space.
2814
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002815 *'formatprg'* *'fp'*
2816'formatprg' 'fp' string (default "")
2817 global
2818 {not in Vi}
2819 The name of an external program that will be used to format the lines
2820 selected with the "gq" command. The program must take the input on
2821 stdin and produce the output on stdout. The Unix program "fmt" is
2822 such a program. If this option is an empty string, the internal
2823 format function will be used |C-indenting|. Environment variables are
2824 expanded |:set_env|. See |option-backslash| about including spaces
2825 and backslashes.
2826 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
2827 security reasons.
2828
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +00002829 *'fsync'* *'fs'*
2830'fsync' 'fs' boolean (default on)
2831 global
2832 {not in Vi}
2833 When on, the library function fsync() will be called after writing a
2834 file. This will flush a file to disk, ensuring that it is safely
2835 written even on filesystems which do metadata-only journaling. This
2836 will force the harddrive to spin up on Linux systems running in laptop
2837 mode, so it may be undesirable in some situations. Be warned that
2838 turning this off increases the chances of data loss after a crash. On
2839 systems without an fsync() implementation, this variable is always
2840 off.
2841 Also see 'swapsync' for controlling fsync() on swap files.
2842
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002843 *'gdefault'* *'gd'* *'nogdefault'* *'nogd'*
2844'gdefault' 'gd' boolean (default off)
2845 global
2846 {not in Vi}
2847 When on, the ":substitute" flag 'g' is default on. This means that
2848 all matches in a line are substituted instead of one. When a 'g' flag
2849 is given to a ":substitute" command, this will toggle the substitution
2850 of all or one match. See |complex-change|.
2851
2852 command 'gdefault' on 'gdefault' off ~
2853 :s/// subst. all subst. one
2854 :s///g subst. one subst. all
2855 :s///gg subst. all subst. one
2856
2857 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
2858
2859 *'grepformat'* *'gfm'*
2860'grepformat' 'gfm' string (default "%f:%l%m,%f %l%m")
2861 global
2862 {not in Vi}
2863 Format to recognize for the ":grep" command output.
2864 This is a scanf-like string that uses the same format as the
2865 'errorformat' option: see |errorformat|.
2866
2867 *'grepprg'* *'gp'*
2868'grepprg' 'gp' string (default "grep -n ",
2869 Unix: "grep -n $* /dev/null",
2870 Win32: "findstr /n" or "grep -n",
2871 VMS: "SEARCH/NUMBERS ")
2872 global or local to buffer |global-local|
2873 {not in Vi}
Bram Moolenaar7c626922005-02-07 22:01:03 +00002874 Program to use for the |:grep| command. This option may contain '%'
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002875 and '#' characters, which are expanded like when used in a command-
2876 line. The placeholder "$*" is allowed to specify where the arguments
2877 will be included. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. See
2878 |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
2879 When your "grep" accepts the "-H" argument, use this to make ":grep"
2880 also work well with a single file: >
2881 :set grepprg=grep\ -nH
Bram Moolenaar7c626922005-02-07 22:01:03 +00002882< Special value: When 'grepprg' is set to "internal" the |:grep| command
2883 works like |:vimgrep| and |:grepadd| like |:vimgrepadd|.
Bram Moolenaar86b68352004-12-27 21:59:20 +00002884 See also the section |:make_makeprg|, since most of the comments there
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002885 apply equally to 'grepprg'.
2886 For Win32, the default is "findstr /n" if "findstr.exe" can be found,
2887 otherwise it's "grep -n".
2888 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
2889 security reasons.
2890
2891 *'guicursor'* *'gcr'* *E545* *E546* *E548* *E549*
2892'guicursor' 'gcr' string (default "n-v-c:block-Cursor/lCursor,
2893 ve:ver35-Cursor,
2894 o:hor50-Cursor,
2895 i-ci:ver25-Cursor/lCursor,
2896 r-cr:hor20-Cursor/lCursor,
2897 sm:block-Cursor
2898 -blinkwait175-blinkoff150-blinkon175",
2899 for MS-DOS and Win32 console:
2900 "n-v-c:block,o:hor50,i-ci:hor15,
2901 r-cr:hor30,sm:block")
2902 global
2903 {not in Vi}
2904 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled, and
2905 for MS-DOS and Win32 console}
2906 This option tells Vim what the cursor should look like in different
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002907 modes. It fully works in the GUI. In an MSDOS or Win32 console, only
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002908 the height of the cursor can be changed. This can be done by
2909 specifying a block cursor, or a percentage for a vertical or
2910 horizontal cursor.
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +00002911 For a console the 't_SI' and 't_EI' escape sequences are used.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002912
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002913 The option is a comma separated list of parts. Each part consist of a
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002914 mode-list and an argument-list:
2915 mode-list:argument-list,mode-list:argument-list,..
2916 The mode-list is a dash separated list of these modes:
2917 n Normal mode
2918 v Visual mode
2919 ve Visual mode with 'selection' "exclusive" (same as 'v',
2920 if not specified)
2921 o Operator-pending mode
2922 i Insert mode
2923 r Replace mode
2924 c Command-line Normal (append) mode
2925 ci Command-line Insert mode
2926 cr Command-line Replace mode
2927 sm showmatch in Insert mode
2928 a all modes
2929 The argument-list is a dash separated list of these arguments:
2930 hor{N} horizontal bar, {N} percent of the character height
2931 ver{N} vertical bar, {N} percent of the character width
2932 block block cursor, fills the whole character
2933 [only one of the above three should be present]
2934 blinkwait{N} *cursor-blinking*
2935 blinkon{N}
2936 blinkoff{N}
2937 blink times for cursor: blinkwait is the delay before
2938 the cursor starts blinking, blinkon is the time that
2939 the cursor is shown and blinkoff is the time that the
2940 cursor is not shown. The times are in msec. When one
2941 of the numbers is zero, there is no blinking. The
2942 default is: "blinkwait700-blinkon400-blinkoff250".
2943 These numbers are used for a missing entry. This
2944 means that blinking is enabled by default. To switch
2945 blinking off you can use "blinkon0". The cursor only
2946 blinks when Vim is waiting for input, not while
2947 executing a command.
2948 To make the cursor blink in an xterm, see
2949 |xterm-blink|.
2950 {group-name}
2951 a highlight group name, that sets the color and font
2952 for the cursor
2953 {group-name}/{group-name}
2954 Two highlight group names, the first is used when
2955 no language mappings are used, the other when they
2956 are. |language-mapping|
2957
2958 Examples of parts:
2959 n-c-v:block-nCursor in Normal, Command-line and Visual mode, use a
2960 block cursor with colors from the "nCursor"
2961 highlight group
2962 i-ci:ver30-iCursor-blinkwait300-blinkon200-blinkoff150
2963 In Insert and Command-line Insert mode, use a
2964 30% vertical bar cursor with colors from the
2965 "iCursor" highlight group. Blink a bit
2966 faster.
2967
2968 The 'a' mode is different. It will set the given argument-list for
2969 all modes. It does not reset anything to defaults. This can be used
2970 to do a common setting for all modes. For example, to switch off
2971 blinking: "a:blinkon0"
2972
2973 Examples of cursor highlighting: >
2974 :highlight Cursor gui=reverse guifg=NONE guibg=NONE
2975 :highlight Cursor gui=NONE guifg=bg guibg=fg
2976<
2977 *'guifont'* *'gfn'*
2978 *E235* *E596* *E610* *E611*
2979'guifont' 'gfn' string (default "")
2980 global
2981 {not in Vi}
2982 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled}
2983 This is a list of fonts which will be used for the GUI version of Vim.
2984 In its simplest form the value is just one font name. When
2985 the font cannot be found you will get an error message. To try other
2986 font names a list can be specified, font names separated with commas.
2987 The first valid font is used.
Bram Moolenaared203462004-06-16 11:19:22 +00002988
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00002989 On systems where 'guifontset' is supported (X11) and 'guifontset' is
2990 not empty, then 'guifont' is not used.
Bram Moolenaared203462004-06-16 11:19:22 +00002991
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002992 Spaces after a comma are ignored. To include a comma in a font name
2993 precede it with a backslash. Setting an option requires an extra
2994 backslash before a space and a backslash. See also
2995 |option-backslash|. For example: >
2996 :set guifont=Screen15,\ 7x13,font\\,with\\,commas
Bram Moolenaared203462004-06-16 11:19:22 +00002997< will make Vim try to use the font "Screen15" first, and if it fails it
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002998 will try to use "7x13" and then "font,with,commas" instead.
Bram Moolenaared203462004-06-16 11:19:22 +00002999
3000 If none of the fonts can be loaded, Vim will keep the current setting.
3001 If an empty font list is given, Vim will try using other resource
3002 settings (for X, it will use the Vim.font resource), and finally it
3003 will try some builtin default which should always be there ("7x13" in
3004 the case of X). The font names given should be "normal" fonts. Vim
3005 will try to find the related bold and italic fonts.
3006
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003007 For Win32, GTK, Mac OS and Photon: >
Bram Moolenaared203462004-06-16 11:19:22 +00003008 :set guifont=*
3009< will bring up a font requester, where you can pick the font you want.
3010
3011 The font name depends on the GUI used. See |setting-guifont| for a
3012 way to set 'guifont' for various systems.
3013
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003014 For the GTK+ 2 GUI the font name looks like this: >
3015 :set guifont=Andale\ Mono\ 11
3016< That's all. XLFDs are no longer accepted.
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003017
3018 For Mac OSX you can use something like this: >
3019 :set guifont=Monaco:h10
3020< *E236*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003021 Note that the fonts must be mono-spaced (all characters have the same
Bram Moolenaared203462004-06-16 11:19:22 +00003022 width). An exception is GTK 2: all fonts are accepted, but
3023 mono-spaced fonts look best.
3024
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003025 To preview a font on X11, you might be able to use the "xfontsel"
3026 program. The "xlsfonts" program gives a list of all available fonts.
Bram Moolenaared203462004-06-16 11:19:22 +00003027
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003028 For the Win32 GUI *E244* *E245*
3029 - takes these options in the font name:
3030 hXX - height is XX (points, can be floating-point)
3031 wXX - width is XX (points, can be floating-point)
3032 b - bold
3033 i - italic
3034 u - underline
3035 s - strikeout
3036 cXX - character set XX. valid charsets are: ANSI, ARABIC,
3037 BALTIC, CHINESEBIG5, DEFAULT, EASTEUROPE, GB2312, GREEK,
3038 HANGEUL, HEBREW, JOHAB, MAC, OEM, RUSSIAN, SHIFTJIS,
3039 SYMBOL, THAI, TURKISH, VIETNAMESE ANSI and BALTIC.
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00003040 Normally you would use "cDEFAULT".
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003041
3042 Use a ':' to separate the options.
3043 - A '_' can be used in the place of a space, so you don't need to use
3044 backslashes to escape the spaces.
3045 - Examples: >
3046 :set guifont=courier_new:h12:w5:b:cRUSSIAN
3047 :set guifont=Andale_Mono:h7.5:w4.5
3048< See also |font-sizes|.
3049
3050 *'guifontset'* *'gfs'*
3051 *E250* *E252* *E234* *E597* *E598*
3052'guifontset' 'gfs' string (default "")
3053 global
3054 {not in Vi}
3055 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled and
3056 with the |+xfontset| feature}
3057 {not available in the GTK+ 2 GUI}
3058 When not empty, specifies two (or more) fonts to be used. The first
3059 one for normal English, the second one for your special language. See
3060 |xfontset|.
3061 Setting this option also means that all font names will be handled as
3062 a fontset name. Also the ones used for the "font" argument of the
3063 |:highlight| command.
3064 The fonts must match with the current locale. If fonts for the
3065 character sets that the current locale uses are not included, setting
3066 'guifontset' will fail.
3067 Note the difference between 'guifont' and 'guifontset': In 'guifont'
3068 the comma-separated names are alternative names, one of which will be
3069 used. In 'guifontset' the whole string is one fontset name,
3070 including the commas. It is not possible to specify alternative
3071 fontset names.
3072 This example works on many X11 systems: >
3073 :set guifontset=-*-*-medium-r-normal--16-*-*-*-c-*-*-*
3074<
3075 *'guifontwide'* *'gfw'* *E231* *E533* *E534*
3076'guifontwide' 'gfw' string (default "")
3077 global
3078 {not in Vi}
3079 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled}
3080 When not empty, specifies a comma-separated list of fonts to be used
3081 for double-width characters. The first font that can be loaded is
3082 used.
3083 Note: The size of these fonts must be exactly twice as wide as the one
3084 specified with 'guifont' and the same height.
3085
3086 All GUI versions but GTK+ 2:
3087
3088 'guifontwide' is only used when 'encoding' is set to "utf-8" and
3089 'guifontset' is empty or invalid.
3090 When 'guifont' is set and a valid font is found in it and
3091 'guifontwide' is empty Vim will attempt to find a matching
3092 double-width font and set 'guifontwide' to it.
3093
3094 GTK+ 2 GUI only: *guifontwide_gtk2*
3095
3096 If set and valid, 'guifontwide' is always used for double width
3097 characters, even if 'encoding' is not set to "utf-8".
3098 Vim does not attempt to find an appropriate value for 'guifontwide'
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003099 automatically. If 'guifontwide' is empty Pango/Xft will choose the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003100 font for characters not available in 'guifont'. Thus you do not need
3101 to set 'guifontwide' at all unless you want to override the choice
3102 made by Pango/Xft.
3103
3104 *'guiheadroom'* *'ghr'*
3105'guiheadroom' 'ghr' number (default 50)
3106 global
3107 {not in Vi} {only for GTK and X11 GUI}
3108 The number of pixels subtracted from the screen height when fitting
3109 the GUI window on the screen. Set this before the GUI is started,
3110 e.g., in your |gvimrc| file. When zero, the whole screen height will
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003111 be used by the window. When positive, the specified number of pixel
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003112 lines will be left for window decorations and other items on the
3113 screen. Set it to a negative value to allow windows taller than the
3114 screen.
3115
3116 *'guioptions'* *'go'*
3117'guioptions' 'go' string (default "gmrLtT" (MS-Windows),
3118 "agimrLtT" (GTK, Motif and Athena)
3119 global
3120 {not in Vi}
3121 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled}
Bram Moolenaared203462004-06-16 11:19:22 +00003122 This option only has an effect in the GUI version of Vim. It is a
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003123 sequence of letters which describes what components and options of the
3124 GUI should be used.
3125 To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the
3126 "+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|.
3127
3128 Valid letters are as follows:
3129 *guioptions_a*
3130 'a' Autoselect: If present, then whenever VISUAL mode is started,
3131 or the Visual area extended, Vim tries to become the owner of
3132 the windowing system's global selection. This means that the
3133 Visually highlighted text is available for pasting into other
3134 applications as well as into Vim itself. When the Visual mode
3135 ends, possibly due to an operation on the text, or when an
3136 application wants to paste the selection, the highlighted text
3137 is automatically yanked into the "* selection register.
3138 Thus the selection is still available for pasting into other
3139 applications after the VISUAL mode has ended.
3140 If not present, then Vim won't become the owner of the
3141 windowing system's global selection unless explicitly told to
3142 by a yank or delete operation for the "* register.
3143 The same applies to the modeless selection.
3144
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003145 'A' Autoselect for the modeless selection. Like 'a', but only
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003146 applies to the modeless selection.
3147
3148 'guioptions' autoselect Visual autoselect modeless ~
3149 "" - -
3150 "a" yes yes
3151 "A" - yes
3152 "aA" yes yes
3153
3154 'c' Use console dialogs instead of popup dialogs for simple
3155 choices.
3156
3157 'f' Foreground: Don't use fork() to detach the GUI from the shell
3158 where it was started. Use this for programs that wait for the
3159 editor to finish (e.g., an e-mail program). Alternatively you
3160 can use "gvim -f" or ":gui -f" to start the GUI in the
3161 foreground. |gui-fork|
3162 Note: Set this option in the vimrc file. The forking may have
3163 happened already when the gvimrc file is read.
3164
3165 'i' Use a Vim icon. For GTK with KDE it is used in the left-upper
3166 corner of the window. It's black&white on non-GTK, because of
3167 limitations of X11. For a color icon, see |X11-icon|.
3168
3169 'm' Menu bar is present.
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003170 'M' The system menu "$VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim" is not sourced. Note
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003171 that this flag must be added in the .vimrc file, before
3172 switching on syntax or filetype recognition (when the .gvimrc
3173 file is sourced the system menu has already been loaded; the
3174 ":syntax on" and ":filetype on" commands load the menu too).
3175 'g' Grey menu items: Make menu items that are not active grey. If
3176 'g' is not included inactive menu items are not shown at all.
3177 Exception: Athena will always use grey menu items.
3178
3179 't' Include tearoff menu items. Currently only works for Win32,
3180 GTK+, and Motif 1.2 GUI.
3181 'T' Include Toolbar. Currently only in Win32, GTK+, Motif, and
3182 Athena GUIs.
3183
3184 'r' Right-hand scrollbar is always present.
3185 'R' Right-hand scrollbar is present when there is a vertically
3186 split window.
3187 'l' Left-hand scrollbar is always present.
3188 'L' Left-hand scrollbar is present when there is a vertically
3189 split window.
3190 'b' Bottom (horizontal) scrollbar is present. Its size depends on
3191 the longest visible line, or on the cursor line if the 'h'
3192 flag is included. |gui-horiz-scroll|
3193 'h' Limit horizontal scrollbar size to the length of the cursor
3194 line. Reduces computations. |gui-horiz-scroll|
3195
3196 And yes, you may even have scrollbars on the left AND the right if
3197 you really want to :-). See |gui-scrollbars| for more information.
3198
3199 'v' Use a vertical button layout for dialogs. When not included,
3200 a horizontal layout is preferred, but when it doesn't fit a
3201 vertical layout is used anyway.
3202 'p' Use Pointer callbacks for X11 GUI. This is required for some
3203 window managers. If the cursor is not blinking or hollow at
3204 the right moment, try adding this flag. This must be done
3205 before starting the GUI. Set it in your gvimrc. Adding or
3206 removing it after the GUI has started has no effect.
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003207 'F' Add a footer. Only for Motif. See |gui-footer|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003208
3209 *'guipty'* *'noguipty'*
3210'guipty' boolean (default on)
3211 global
3212 {not in Vi}
3213 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled}
3214 Only in the GUI: If on, an attempt is made to open a pseudo-tty for
3215 I/O to/from shell commands. See |gui-pty|.
3216
3217 *'helpfile'* *'hf'*
3218'helpfile' 'hf' string (default (MSDOS) "$VIMRUNTIME\doc\help.txt"
3219 (others) "$VIMRUNTIME/doc/help.txt")
3220 global
3221 {not in Vi}
3222 Name of the main help file. All distributed help files should be
3223 placed together in one directory. Additionally, all "doc" directories
3224 in 'runtimepath' will be used.
3225 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. For example:
3226 "$VIMRUNTIME/doc/help.txt". If $VIMRUNTIME is not set, $VIM is also
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003227 tried. Also see |$VIMRUNTIME| and |option-backslash| about including
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003228 spaces and backslashes.
3229 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
3230 security reasons.
3231
3232 *'helpheight'* *'hh'*
3233'helpheight' 'hh' number (default 20)
3234 global
3235 {not in Vi}
3236 {not available when compiled without the +windows
3237 feature}
3238 Minimal initial height of the help window when it is opened with the
3239 ":help" command. The initial height of the help window is half of the
3240 current window, or (when the 'ea' option is on) the same as other
3241 windows. When the height is less than 'helpheight', the height is
3242 set to 'helpheight'. Set to zero to disable.
3243
3244 *'helplang'* *'hlg'*
3245'helplang' 'hlg' string (default: messages language or empty)
3246 global
3247 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_lang|
3248 feature}
3249 {not in Vi}
3250 Comma separated list of languages. Vim will use the first language
3251 for which the desired help can be found. The English help will always
3252 be used as a last resort. You can add "en" to prefer English over
3253 another language, but that will only find tags that exist in that
3254 language and not in the English help.
3255 Example: >
3256 :set helplang=de,it
3257< This will first search German, then Italian and finally English help
3258 files.
3259 When using |CTRL-]| and ":help!" in a non-English help file Vim will
3260 try to find the tag in the current language before using this option.
3261 See |help-translated|.
3262
3263 *'hidden'* *'hid'* *'nohidden'* *'nohid'*
3264'hidden' 'hid' boolean (default off)
3265 global
3266 {not in Vi}
3267 When off a buffer is unloaded when it is |abandon|ed. When on a
3268 buffer becomes hidden when it is |abandon|ed. If the buffer is still
3269 displayed in another window, it does not become hidden, of course.
3270 The commands that move through the buffer list sometimes make a buffer
3271 hidden although the 'hidden' option is off: When the buffer is
3272 modified, 'autowrite' is off or writing is not possible, and the '!'
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003273 flag was used. See also |windows.txt|.
Bram Moolenaarcfbc5ee2004-07-02 15:38:35 +00003274 To only make one buffer hidden use the 'bufhidden' option.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003275 This option is set for one command with ":hide {command}" |:hide|.
3276 WARNING: It's easy to forget that you have changes in hidden buffers.
3277 Think twice when using ":q!" or ":qa!".
3278
3279 *'highlight'* *'hl'*
3280'highlight' 'hl' string (default (as a single string):
3281 "8:SpecialKey,@:NonText,d:Directory,
3282 e:ErrorMsg,i:IncSearch,l:Search,m:MoreMsg,
3283 M:ModeMsg,n:LineNr,r:Question,
3284 s:StatusLine,S:StatusLineNC,c:VertSplit
3285 t:Title,v:Visual,w:WarningMsg,W:WildMenu,
3286 f:Folded,F:FoldColumn,A:DiffAdd,
3287 C:DiffChange,D:DiffDelete,T:DiffText,
3288 >:SignColumn")
3289 global
3290 {not in Vi}
3291 This option can be used to set highlighting mode for various
3292 occasions. It is a comma separated list of character pairs. The
3293 first character in a pair gives the occasion, the second the mode to
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003294 use for that occasion. The occasions are:
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003295 |hl-SpecialKey| 8 Meta and special keys listed with ":map"
3296 |hl-NonText| @ '~' and '@' at the end of the window and
3297 characters from 'showbreak'
3298 |hl-Directory| d directories in CTRL-D listing and other special
3299 things in listings
3300 |hl-ErrorMsg| e error messages
3301 h (obsolete, ignored)
3302 |hl-IncSearch| i 'incsearch' highlighting
3303 |hl-Search| l last search pattern highlighting (see 'hlsearch')
3304 |hl-MoreMsg| m |more-prompt|
3305 |hl-ModeMsg| M Mode (e.g., "-- INSERT --")
3306 |hl-LineNr| n line number for ":number" and ":#" commands
3307 |hl-Question| r |hit-enter| prompt and yes/no questions
3308 |hl-StatusLine| s status line of current window |status-line|
3309 |hl-StatusLineNC| S status lines of not-current windows
3310 |hl-Title| t Titles for output from ":set all", ":autocmd" etc.
3311 |hl-VertSplit| c column used to separate vertically split windows
3312 |hl-Visual| v Visual mode
3313 |hl-VisualNOS| V Visual mode when Vim does is "Not Owning the
3314 Selection" Only X11 Gui's |gui-x11| and
3315 |xterm-clipboard|.
3316 |hl-WarningMsg| w warning messages
3317 |hl-WildMenu| W wildcard matches displayed for 'wildmenu'
3318 |hl-Folded| f line used for closed folds
3319 |hl-FoldColumn| F 'foldcolumn'
3320 |hl-SignColumn| > column used for |signs|
3321
3322 The display modes are:
3323 r reverse (termcap entry "mr" and "me")
3324 i italic (termcap entry "ZH" and "ZR")
3325 b bold (termcap entry "md" and "me")
3326 s standout (termcap entry "so" and "se")
3327 u underline (termcap entry "us" and "ue")
3328 n no highlighting
3329 - no highlighting
3330 : use a highlight group
3331 The default is used for occasions that are not included.
3332 If you want to change what the display modes do, see |dos-colors|
3333 for an example.
3334 When using the ':' display mode, this must be followed by the name of
3335 a highlight group. A highlight group can be used to define any type
3336 of highlighting, including using color. See |:highlight| on how to
3337 define one. The default uses a different group for each occasion.
3338 See |highlight-default| for the default highlight groups.
3339
3340 *'hlsearch'* *'hls'* *'nohlsearch'* *'nohls'*
3341'hlsearch' 'hls' boolean (default off)
3342 global
3343 {not in Vi}
3344 {not available when compiled without the
3345 |+extra_search| feature}
3346 When there is a previous search pattern, highlight all its matches.
3347 The type of highlighting used can be set with the 'l' occasion in the
3348 'highlight' option. This uses the "Search" highlight group by
3349 default. Note that only the matching text is highlighted, any offsets
3350 are not applied.
3351 See also: 'incsearch' and |:match|.
3352 When you get bored looking at the highlighted matches, you can turn it
3353 off with |:nohlsearch|. As soon as you use a search command, the
3354 highlighting comes back.
3355 When the search pattern can match an end-of-line, Vim will try to
3356 highlight all of the matched text. However, this depends on where the
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003357 search starts. This will be the first line in the window or the first
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003358 line below a closed fold. A match in a previous line which is not
3359 drawn may not continue in an newly drawn line.
3360 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
3361
3362 *'history'* *'hi'*
3363'history' 'hi' number (Vim default: 20, Vi default: 0)
3364 global
3365 {not in Vi}
3366 A history of ":" commands, and a history of previous search patterns
3367 are remembered. This option decides how many entries may be stored in
3368 each of these histories (see |cmdline-editing|).
3369 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
3370 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
3371
3372 *'hkmap'* *'hk'* *'nohkmap'* *'nohk'*
3373'hkmap' 'hk' boolean (default off)
3374 global
3375 {not in Vi}
3376 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
3377 feature}
3378 When on, the keyboard is mapped for the Hebrew character set.
3379 Normally you would set 'allowrevins' and use CTRL-_ in insert mode to
3380 toggle this option. See |rileft.txt|.
3381 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
3382
3383 *'hkmapp'* *'hkp'* *'nohkmapp'* *'nohkp'*
3384'hkmapp' 'hkp' boolean (default off)
3385 global
3386 {not in Vi}
3387 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
3388 feature}
3389 When on, phonetic keyboard mapping is used. 'hkmap' must also be on.
3390 This is useful if you have a non-Hebrew keyboard.
3391 See |rileft.txt|.
3392 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
3393
3394 *'icon'* *'noicon'*
3395'icon' boolean (default off, on when title can be restored)
3396 global
3397 {not in Vi}
3398 {not available when compiled without the |+title|
3399 feature}
3400 When on, the icon text of the window will be set to the value of
3401 'iconstring' (if it is not empty), or to the name of the file
3402 currently being edited. Only the last part of the name is used.
3403 Overridden by the 'iconstring' option.
3404 Only works if the terminal supports setting window icons (currently
3405 only X11 GUI and terminals with a non-empty 't_IS' option - these are
3406 Unix xterm and iris-ansi by default, where 't_IS' is taken from the
3407 builtin termcap).
3408 When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original icon will be
3409 restored if possible |X11|. See |X11-icon| for changing the icon on
3410 X11.
3411
3412 *'iconstring'*
3413'iconstring' string (default "")
3414 global
3415 {not in Vi}
3416 {not available when compiled without the |+title|
3417 feature}
3418 When this option is not empty, it will be used for the icon text of
3419 the window. This happens only when the 'icon' option is on.
3420 Only works if the terminal supports setting window icon text
3421 (currently only X11 GUI and terminals with a non-empty 't_IS' option).
3422 Does not work for MS Windows.
3423 When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original icon will be
3424 restored if possible |X11|.
3425 When this option contains printf-style '%' items, they will be
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003426 expanded according to the rules used for 'statusline'. See
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003427 'titlestring' for example settings.
3428 {not available when compiled without the |+statusline| feature}
3429
3430 *'ignorecase'* *'ic'* *'noignorecase'* *'noic'*
3431'ignorecase' 'ic' boolean (default off)
3432 global
3433 Ignore case in search patterns. Also used when searching in the tags
3434 file.
3435 Also see 'smartcase'.
3436 Can be overruled by using "\c" or "\C" in the pattern, see
3437 |/ignorecase|.
3438
3439 *'imactivatekey'* *'imak'*
3440'imactivatekey' 'imak' string (default "")
3441 global
3442 {not in Vi}
3443 {only available when compiled with |+xim| and
3444 |+GUI_GTK|}
3445 Specifies the key that your Input Method in X-Windows uses for
3446 activation. When this is specified correctly, vim can fully control
3447 IM with 'imcmdline', 'iminsert' and 'imsearch'.
3448 You can't use this option to change the activation key, the option
3449 tells Vim what the key is.
3450 Format:
3451 [MODIFIER_FLAG-]KEY_STRING
3452
3453 These characters can be used for MODIFIER_FLAG (case is ignored):
3454 S Shift key
3455 L Lock key
3456 C Control key
3457 1 Mod1 key
3458 2 Mod2 key
3459 3 Mod3 key
3460 4 Mod4 key
3461 5 Mod5 key
3462 Combinations are allowed, for example "S-C-space" or "SC-space" are
3463 both shift+ctrl+space.
3464 See <X11/keysymdef.h> and XStringToKeysym for KEY_STRING.
3465
3466 Example: >
3467 :set imactivatekey=S-space
3468< "S-space" means shift+space. This is the activation key for kinput2 +
3469 canna (Japanese), and ami (Korean).
3470
3471 *'imcmdline'* *'imc'* *'noimcmdline'* *'noimc'*
3472'imcmdline' 'imc' boolean (default off)
3473 global
3474 {not in Vi}
3475 {only available when compiled with the |+xim|
3476 |+multi_byte_ime| or |global-ime| feature}
3477 When set the Input Method is always on when starting to edit a command
3478 line, unless entering a search pattern (see 'imsearch' for that).
3479 Setting this option is useful when your input method allows entering
3480 English characters directly, e.g., when it's used to type accented
3481 characters with dead keys.
3482
3483 *'imdisable'* *'imd'* *'nodisable'* *'noimd'*
3484'imdisable' 'imd' boolean (default off, on for some systems (SGI))
3485 global
3486 {not in Vi}
3487 {only available when compiled with the |+xim|
3488 |+multi_byte_ime| or |global-ime| feature}
3489 When set the Input Method is never used. This is useful to disable
3490 the IM when it doesn't work properly.
3491 Currently this option is on by default for SGI/IRIX machines. This
3492 may change in later releases.
3493
3494 *'iminsert'* *'imi'*
3495'iminsert' 'imi' number (default 0, 2 when an input method is supported)
3496 local to buffer
3497 {not in Vi}
3498 Specifies whether :lmap or an Input Method (IM) is to be used in
3499 Insert mode. Valid values:
3500 0 :lmap is off and IM is off
3501 1 :lmap is ON and IM is off
3502 2 :lmap is off and IM is ON
3503 2 is available only when compiled with the |+multi_byte_ime|, |+xim|
3504 or |global-ime|.
3505 To always reset the option to zero when leaving Insert mode with <Esc>
3506 this can be used: >
3507 :inoremap <ESC> <ESC>:set iminsert=0<CR>
3508< This makes :lmap and IM turn off automatically when leaving Insert
3509 mode.
3510 Note that this option changes when using CTRL-^ in Insert mode
3511 |i_CTRL-^|.
3512 The value is set to 1 when setting 'keymap' to a valid keymap name.
3513 It is also used for the argument of commands like "r" and "f".
3514 The value 0 may not work correctly with Athena and Motif with some XIM
3515 methods. Use 'imdisable' to disable XIM then.
3516
3517 *'imsearch'* *'ims'*
3518'imsearch' 'ims' number (default 0, 2 when an input method is supported)
3519 local to buffer
3520 {not in Vi}
3521 Specifies whether :lmap or an Input Method (IM) is to be used when
3522 entering a search pattern. Valid values:
3523 -1 the value of 'iminsert' is used, makes it look like
3524 'iminsert' is also used when typing a search pattern
3525 0 :lmap is off and IM is off
3526 1 :lmap is ON and IM is off
3527 2 :lmap is off and IM is ON
3528 Note that this option changes when using CTRL-^ in Command-line mode
3529 |c_CTRL-^|.
3530 The value is set to 1 when it is not -1 and setting the 'keymap'
3531 option to a valid keymap name.
3532 The value 0 may not work correctly with Athena and Motif with some XIM
3533 methods. Use 'imdisable' to disable XIM then.
3534
3535 *'include'* *'inc'*
3536'include' 'inc' string (default "^\s*#\s*include")
3537 global or local to buffer |global-local|
3538 {not in Vi}
3539 {not available when compiled without the
3540 |+find_in_path| feature}
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003541 Pattern to be used to find an include command. It is a search
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003542 pattern, just like for the "/" command (See |pattern|). The default
3543 value is for C programs. This option is used for the commands "[i",
3544 "]I", "[d", etc.. The 'isfname' option is used to recognize the file
3545 name that comes after the matched pattern. See |option-backslash|
3546 about including spaces and backslashes.
3547
3548 *'includeexpr'* *'inex'*
3549'includeexpr' 'inex' string (default "")
3550 local to buffer
3551 {not in Vi}
3552 {not available when compiled without the
3553 |+find_in_path| or |+eval| feature}
3554 Expression to be used to transform the string found with the 'include'
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003555 option to a file name. Mostly useful to change "." to "/" for Java: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003556 :set includeexpr=substitute(v:fname,'\\.','/','g')
3557< The "v:fname" variable will be set to the file name that was detected.
3558 Evaluated in the |sandbox|.
3559 Also used for the |gf| command if an unmodified file name can't be
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003560 found. Allows doing "gf" on the name after an 'include' statement.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003561 Also used for |<cfile>|.
3562
3563 *'incsearch'* *'is'* *'noincsearch'* *'nois'*
3564'incsearch' 'is' boolean (default off)
3565 global
3566 {not in Vi}
3567 {not available when compiled without the
3568 |+extra_search| feature}
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00003569 While typing a search command, show where the pattern, as it was typed
3570 so far, matches. The matched string is highlighted. If the pattern
3571 is invalid or not found, nothing is shown. The screen will be updated
3572 often, this is only useful on fast terminals.
3573 Note that the match will be shown, but the cursor will return to its
3574 original position when no match is found and when pressing <Esc>. You
3575 still need to finish the search command with <Enter> to move the
3576 cursor to the match.
3577 The highlighting can be set with the 'i' flag in 'highlight'.
3578 See also: 'hlsearch'.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003579 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
3580
3581 *'indentexpr'* *'inde'*
3582'indentexpr' 'inde' string (default "")
3583 local to buffer
3584 {not in Vi}
3585 {not available when compiled without the |+cindent|
3586 or |+eval| features}
3587 Expression which is evaluated to obtain the proper indent for a line.
3588 It is used when a new line is created, for the |=| operator and
3589 in Insert mode as specified with the 'indentkeys' option.
3590 When this option is not empty, it overrules the 'cindent' and
3591 'smartindent' indenting.
3592 When 'paste' is set this option is not used for indenting.
3593 The expression is evaluated with |v:lnum| set to the line number for
3594 which the indent is to be computed. The cursor is also as this line
3595 when the expression is evaluated (but it may be moved around).
3596 The expression must return the number of spaces worth of indent. It
3597 can return "-1" to keep the current indent (this means 'autoindent' is
3598 used for the indent).
3599 Functions useful for computing the indent are |indent()|, |cindent()|
3600 and |lispindent()|.
3601 The evaluation of the expression must not have side effects! It must
3602 not change the text, jump to another window, etc. Afterwards the
3603 cursor position is always restored, thus the cursor may be moved.
3604 Normally this option would be set to call a function: >
3605 :set indentexpr=GetMyIndent()
3606< Error messages will be suppressed, unless the 'debug' option contains
3607 "msg".
3608 See |indent-expression|. Also see |eval-sandbox|.
3609 NOTE: This option is made empty when 'compatible' is set.
3610
3611 *'indentkeys'* *'indk'*
3612'indentkeys' 'indk' string (default "0{,0},:,0#,!^F,o,O,e")
3613 local to buffer
3614 {not in Vi}
3615 {not available when compiled without the |+cindent|
3616 feature}
3617 A list of keys that, when typed in Insert mode, cause reindenting of
3618 the current line. Only happens if 'indentexpr' isn't empty.
3619 The format is identical to 'cinkeys', see |indentkeys-format|.
3620 See |C-indenting| and |indent-expression|.
3621
3622 *'infercase'* *'inf'* *'noinfercase'* *'noinf'*
3623'infercase' 'inf' boolean (default off)
3624 local to buffer
3625 {not in Vi}
3626 When doing keyword completion in insert mode |ins-completion|, and
3627 'ignorecase' is also on, the case of the match is adjusted. If the
3628 typed text contains a lowercase letter where the match has an upper
3629 case letter, the completed part is made lowercase. If the typed text
3630 has no lowercase letters and the match has a lowercase letter where
3631 the typed text has an uppercase letter, and there is a letter before
3632 it, the completed part is made uppercase.
3633
3634 *'insertmode'* *'im'* *'noinsertmode'* *'noim'*
3635'insertmode' 'im' boolean (default off)
3636 global
3637 {not in Vi}
3638 Makes Vim work in a way that Insert mode is the default mode. Useful
3639 if you want to use Vim as a modeless editor. Used for |evim|.
3640 These Insert mode commands will be useful:
3641 - Use the cursor keys to move around.
3642 - Use CTRL-O to execute one Normal mode command |i_CTRL-O|). When
3643 this is a mapping, it is executed as if 'insertmode' was off.
3644 Normal mode remains active until the mapping is finished.
3645 *i_CTRL-L*
3646 - Use CTRL-L to execute a number of Normal mode commands, then use
3647 <Esc> to get back to Insert mode.
3648
3649 These items change when 'insertmode' is set:
3650 - when starting to edit of a file, Vim goes to Insert mode.
3651 - <Esc> in Insert mode is a no-op and beeps.
3652 - <Esc> in Normal mode makes Vim go to Insert mode.
3653 - CTRL-L in Insert mode is a command, it is not inserted.
3654 - CTRL-Z in Insert mode suspends Vim, see |CTRL-Z|. *i_CTRL-Z*
3655 However, when <Esc> is used inside a mapping, it behaves like
3656 'insertmode' was not set. This was done to be able to use the same
3657 mappings with 'insertmode' set or not set.
3658 When executing commands with |:normal| 'insertmode' is not used.
3659
3660 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
3661
3662 *'isfname'* *'isf'*
3663'isfname' 'isf' string (default for MS-DOS, Win32 and OS/2:
3664 "@,48-57,/,\,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,{,},[,],:,@-@,!,~,="
3665 for AMIGA: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,$,:"
3666 for VMS: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,<,>,[,],:,;,~"
3667 for OS/390: "@,240-249,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,~,="
3668 otherwise: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,~,=")
3669 global
3670 {not in Vi}
3671 The characters specified by this option are included in file names and
3672 path names. Filenames are used for commands like "gf", "[i" and in
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003673 the tags file. It is also used for "\f" in a |pattern|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003674 Multi-byte characters 256 and above are always included, only the
3675 characters up to 255 are specified with this option.
3676 For UTF-8 the characters 0xa0 to 0xff are included as well.
3677
3678 Note that on systems using a backslash as path separator, Vim tries to
3679 do its best to make it work as you would expect. That is a bit
3680 tricky, since Vi originally used the backslash to escape special
3681 characters. Vim will not remove a backslash in front of a normal file
3682 name character on these systems, but it will on Unix and alikes. The
3683 '&' and '^' are not included by default, because these are special for
3684 cmd.exe.
3685
3686 The format of this option is a list of parts, separated with commas.
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003687 Each part can be a single character number or a range. A range is two
3688 character numbers with '-' in between. A character number can be a
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003689 decimal number between 0 and 255 or the ASCII character itself (does
3690 not work for digits). Example:
3691 "_,-,128-140,#-43" (include '_' and '-' and the range
3692 128 to 140 and '#' to 43)
3693 If a part starts with '^', the following character number or range
3694 will be excluded from the option. The option is interpreted from left
3695 to right. Put the excluded character after the range where it is
3696 included. To include '^' itself use it as the last character of the
3697 option or the end of a range. Example:
3698 "^a-z,#,^" (exclude 'a' to 'z', include '#' and '^')
3699 If the character is '@', all characters where isalpha() returns TRUE
3700 are included. Normally these are the characters a to z and A to Z,
3701 plus accented characters. To include '@' itself use "@-@". Examples:
3702 "@,^a-z" All alphabetic characters, excluding lower
3703 case letters.
3704 "a-z,A-Z,@-@" All letters plus the '@' character.
3705 A comma can be included by using it where a character number is
3706 expected. Example:
3707 "48-57,,,_" Digits, comma and underscore.
3708 A comma can be excluded by prepending a '^'. Example:
3709 " -~,^,,9" All characters from space to '~', excluding
3710 comma, plus <Tab>.
3711 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
3712
3713 *'isident'* *'isi'*
3714'isident' 'isi' string (default for MS-DOS, Win32 and OS/2:
3715 "@,48-57,_,128-167,224-235"
3716 otherwise: "@,48-57,_,192-255")
3717 global
3718 {not in Vi}
3719 The characters given by this option are included in identifiers.
3720 Identifiers are used in recognizing environment variables and after a
3721 match of the 'define' option. It is also used for "\i" in a
3722 |pattern|. See 'isfname' for a description of the format of this
3723 option.
3724 Careful: If you change this option, it might break expanding
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003725 environment variables. E.g., when '/' is included and Vim tries to
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003726 expand "$HOME/.viminfo". Maybe you should change 'iskeyword' instead.
3727
3728 *'iskeyword'* *'isk'*
3729'iskeyword' 'isk' string (Vim default for MS-DOS and Win32:
3730 "@,48-57,_,128-167,224-235"
3731 otherwise: "@,48-57,_,192-255"
3732 Vi default: "@,48-57,_")
3733 local to buffer
3734 {not in Vi}
3735 Keywords are used in searching and recognizing with many commands:
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003736 "w", "*", "[i", etc. It is also used for "\k" in a |pattern|. See
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003737 'isfname' for a description of the format of this option. For C
3738 programs you could use "a-z,A-Z,48-57,_,.,-,>".
3739 For a help file it is set to all non-blank printable characters except
3740 '*', '"' and '|' (so that CTRL-] on a command finds the help for that
3741 command).
3742 When the 'lisp' option is on the '-' character is always included.
3743 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
3744 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
3745
3746 *'isprint'* *'isp'*
3747'isprint' 'isp' string (default for MS-DOS, Win32, OS/2 and Macintosh:
3748 "@,~-255"; otherwise: "@,161-255")
3749 global
3750 {not in Vi}
3751 The characters given by this option are displayed directly on the
3752 screen. It is also used for "\p" in a |pattern|. The characters from
3753 space (ASCII 32) to '~' (ASCII 126) are always displayed directly,
3754 even when they are not included in 'isprint' or excluded. See
3755 'isfname' for a description of the format of this option.
3756
3757 Non-printable characters are displayed with two characters:
3758 0 - 31 "^@" - "^_"
3759 32 - 126 always single characters
3760 127 "^?"
3761 128 - 159 "~@" - "~_"
3762 160 - 254 "| " - "|~"
3763 255 "~?"
3764 When 'encoding' is a Unicode one, illegal bytes from 128 to 255 are
3765 displayed as <xx>, with the hexadecimal value of the byte.
3766 When 'display' contains "uhex" all unprintable characters are
3767 displayed as <xx>.
3768 The NonText highlighting will be used for unprintable characters.
3769 |hl-NonText|
3770
3771 Multi-byte characters 256 and above are always included, only the
3772 characters up to 255 are specified with this option. When a character
3773 is printable but it is not available in the current font, a
3774 replacement character will be shown.
3775 Unprintable and zero-width Unicode characters are displayed as <xxxx>.
3776 There is no option to specify these characters.
3777
3778 *'joinspaces'* *'js'* *'nojoinspaces'* *'nojs'*
3779'joinspaces' 'js' boolean (default on)
3780 global
3781 {not in Vi}
3782 Insert two spaces after a '.', '?' and '!' with a join command.
3783 When 'cpoptions' includes the 'j' flag, only do this after a '.'.
3784 Otherwise only one space is inserted.
3785 NOTE: This option is set when 'compatible' is set.
3786
3787 *'key'*
3788'key' string (default "")
3789 local to buffer
3790 {not in Vi}
3791 The key that is used for encrypting and decrypting the current buffer.
3792 See |encryption|.
3793 Careful: Do not set the key value by hand, someone might see the typed
3794 key. Use the |:X| command. But you can make 'key' empty: >
3795 :set key=
3796< It is not possible to get the value of this option with ":set key" or
3797 "echo &key". This is to avoid showing it to someone who shouldn't
3798 know. It also means you cannot see it yourself once you have set it,
3799 be careful not to make a typing error!
3800
3801 *'keymap'* *'kmp'* *E544*
3802'keymap' 'kmp' string (default "")
3803 local to buffer
3804 {not in Vi}
3805 {only available when compiled with the |+keymap|
3806 feature}
3807 Name of a keyboard mapping. See |mbyte-keymap|.
3808 Setting this option to a valid keymap name has the side effect of
3809 setting 'iminsert' to one, so that the keymap becomes effective.
3810 'imsearch' is also set to one, unless it was -1
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +00003811 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003812
3813 *'keymodel'* *'km'*
3814'keymodel' 'km' string (default "")
3815 global
3816 {not in Vi}
3817 List of comma separated words, which enable special things that keys
3818 can do. These values can be used:
3819 startsel Using a shifted special key starts selection (either
3820 Select mode or Visual mode, depending on "key" being
3821 present in 'selectmode').
3822 stopsel Using a not-shifted special key stops selection.
3823 Special keys in this context are the cursor keys, <End>, <Home>,
3824 <PageUp> and <PageDown>.
3825 The 'keymodel' option is set by the |:behave| command.
3826
3827 *'keywordprg'* *'kp'*
3828'keywordprg' 'kp' string (default "man" or "man -s", DOS: ":help",
3829 OS/2: "view /", VMS: "help")
3830 global or local to buffer |global-local|
3831 {not in Vi}
3832 Program to use for the |K| command. Environment variables are
3833 expanded |:set_env|. ":help" may be used to access the Vim internal
3834 help. (Note that previously setting the global option to the empty
3835 value did this, which is now deprecated.)
3836 When "man" is used, Vim will automatically translate a count for the
3837 "K" command to a section number. Also for "man -s", in which case the
3838 "-s" is removed when there is no count.
3839 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
3840 Example: >
3841 :set keywordprg=man\ -s
3842< This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
3843 security reasons.
3844
3845 *'langmap'* *'lmap'* *E357* *E358*
3846'langmap' 'lmap' string (default "")
3847 global
3848 {not in Vi}
3849 {only available when compiled with the |+langmap|
3850 feature}
3851 This option allows switching your keyboard into a special language
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003852 mode. When you are typing text in Insert mode the characters are
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003853 inserted directly. When in command mode the 'langmap' option takes
3854 care of translating these special characters to the original meaning
3855 of the key. This means you don't have to change the keyboard mode to
3856 be able to execute Normal mode commands.
3857 This is the opposite of the 'keymap' option, where characters are
3858 mapped in Insert mode.
3859 This only works for 8-bit characters. The value of 'langmap' may be
3860 specified with multi-byte characters (e.g., UTF-8), but only the lower
3861 8 bits of each character will be used.
3862
3863 Example (for Greek): *greek* >
3864 :set langmap=ÁA,ÂB,ØC,ÄD,ÅE,ÖF,ÃG,ÇH,ÉI,ÎJ,ÊK,ËL,ÌM,ÍN,ÏO,ÐP,QQ,ÑR,ÓS,ÔT,ÈU,ÙV,WW,×X,ÕY,ÆZ,áa,âb,øc,äd,åe,öf,ãg,çh,éi,îj,êk,ël,ìm,ín,ïo,ðp,qq,ñr,ós,ôt,èu,ùv,òw,÷x,õy,æz
3865< Example (exchanges meaning of z and y for commands): >
3866 :set langmap=zy,yz,ZY,YZ
3867<
3868 The 'langmap' option is a list of parts, separated with commas. Each
3869 part can be in one of two forms:
3870 1. A list of pairs. Each pair is a "from" character immediately
3871 followed by the "to" character. Examples: "aA", "aAbBcC".
3872 2. A list of "from" characters, a semi-colon and a list of "to"
3873 characters. Example: "abc;ABC"
3874 Example: "aA,fgh;FGH,cCdDeE"
3875 Special characters need to be preceded with a backslash. These are
3876 ";", ',' and backslash itself.
3877
3878 This will allow you to activate vim actions without having to switch
3879 back and forth between the languages. Your language characters will
3880 be understood as normal vim English characters (according to the
3881 langmap mappings) in the following cases:
3882 o Normal/Visual mode (commands, buffer/register names, user mappings)
3883 o Insert/Replace Mode: Register names after CTRL-R
3884 o Insert/Replace Mode: Mappings
3885 Characters entered in Command-line mode will NOT be affected by
3886 this option. Note that this option can be changed at any time
3887 allowing to switch between mappings for different languages/encodings.
3888 Use a mapping to avoid having to type it each time!
3889
3890 *'langmenu'* *'lm'*
3891'langmenu' 'lm' string (default "")
3892 global
3893 {not in Vi}
3894 {only available when compiled with the |+menu| and
3895 |+multi_lang| features}
3896 Language to use for menu translation. Tells which file is loaded
3897 from the "lang" directory in 'runtimepath': >
3898 "lang/menu_" . &langmenu . ".vim"
3899< (without the spaces). For example, to always use the Dutch menus, no
3900 matter what $LANG is set to: >
3901 :set langmenu=nl_NL.ISO_8859-1
3902< When 'langmenu' is empty, |v:lang| is used.
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +00003903 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003904 If your $LANG is set to a non-English language but you do want to use
3905 the English menus: >
3906 :set langmenu=none
3907< This option must be set before loading menus, switching on filetype
3908 detection or syntax highlighting. Once the menus are defined setting
3909 this option has no effect. But you could do this: >
3910 :source $VIMRUNTIME/delmenu.vim
3911 :set langmenu=de_DE.ISO_8859-1
3912 :source $VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim
3913< Warning: This deletes all menus that you defined yourself!
3914
3915 *'laststatus'* *'ls'*
3916'laststatus' 'ls' number (default 1)
3917 global
3918 {not in Vi}
3919 The value of this option influences when the last window will have a
3920 status line:
3921 0: never
3922 1: only if there are at least two windows
3923 2: always
3924 The screen looks nicer with a status line if you have several
3925 windows, but it takes another screen line. |status-line|
3926
3927 *'lazyredraw'* *'lz'* *'nolazyredraw'* *'nolz'*
3928'lazyredraw' 'lz' boolean (default off)
3929 global
3930 {not in Vi}
3931 When this option is set, the screen will not be redrawn while
3932 executing macros, registers and other commands that have not been
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003933 typed. Also, updating the window title is postponed. To force an
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003934 update use |:redraw|.
3935
3936 *'linebreak'* *'lbr'* *'nolinebreak'* *'nolbr'*
3937'linebreak' 'lbr' boolean (default off)
3938 local to window
3939 {not in Vi}
3940 {not available when compiled without the |+linebreak|
3941 feature}
3942 If on Vim will wrap long lines at a character in 'breakat' rather
3943 than at the last character that fits on the screen. Unlike
3944 'wrapmargin' and 'textwidth', this does not insert <EOL>s in the file,
3945 it only affects the way the file is displayed, not its contents. The
3946 value of 'showbreak' is used to put in front of wrapped lines.
3947 This option is not used when the 'wrap' option is off or 'list' is on.
3948 Note that <Tab> characters after an <EOL> are mostly not displayed
3949 with the right amount of white space.
3950
3951 *'lines'* *E593*
3952'lines' number (default 24 or terminal height)
3953 global
3954 Number of lines of the Vim window.
3955 Normally you don't need to set this. It is done automatically by the
Bram Moolenaar7c626922005-02-07 22:01:03 +00003956 terminal initialization code. Also see |posix-screen-size|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003957 When Vim is running in the GUI or in a resizable window, setting this
3958 option will cause the window size to be changed. When you only want
3959 to use the size for the GUI, put the command in your |gvimrc| file.
3960 Vim limits the number of lines to what fits on the screen. You can
3961 use this command to get the tallest window possible: >
3962 :set lines=999
3963< If you get less lines than expected, check the 'guiheadroom' option.
3964 When you set this option and Vim is unable to change the physical
3965 number of lines of the display, the display may be messed up.
3966
3967 *'linespace'* *'lsp'*
3968'linespace' 'lsp' number (default 0, 1 for Win32 GUI)
3969 global
3970 {not in Vi}
3971 {only in the GUI}
3972 Number of pixel lines inserted between characters. Useful if the font
3973 uses the full character cell height, making lines touch each other.
3974 When non-zero there is room for underlining.
Bram Moolenaarbc7aa852005-03-06 23:38:09 +00003975 With some fonts there can be too much room between lines (to have
3976 space for ascents and descents). Then it makes sense to set
3977 'linespace' to a negative value. This may cause display problems
3978 though!
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003979
3980 *'lisp'* *'nolisp'*
3981'lisp' boolean (default off)
3982 local to buffer
3983 {not available when compiled without the |+lispindent|
3984 feature}
3985 Lisp mode: When <Enter> is typed in insert mode set the indent for
3986 the next line to Lisp standards (well, sort of). Also happens with
3987 "cc" or "S". 'autoindent' must also be on for this to work. The 'p'
3988 flag in 'cpoptions' changes the method of indenting: Vi compatible or
3989 better. Also see 'lispwords'.
3990 The '-' character is included in keyword characters. Redefines the
3991 "=" operator to use this same indentation algorithm rather than
3992 calling an external program if 'equalprg' is empty.
3993 This option is not used when 'paste' is set.
3994 {Vi: Does it a little bit differently}
3995
3996 *'lispwords'* *'lw'*
3997'lispwords' 'lw' string (default is very long)
3998 global
3999 {not in Vi}
4000 {not available when compiled without the |+lispindent|
4001 feature}
4002 Comma separated list of words that influence the Lisp indenting.
4003 |'lisp'|
4004
4005 *'list'* *'nolist'*
4006'list' boolean (default off)
4007 local to window
4008 List mode: Show tabs as CTRL-I, show end of line with $. Useful to
4009 see the difference between tabs and spaces and for trailing blanks.
4010 Note that this will also affect formatting (set with 'textwidth' or
4011 'wrapmargin') when 'cpoptions' includes 'L'. See 'listchars' for
4012 changing the way tabs are displayed.
4013
4014 *'listchars'* *'lcs'*
4015'listchars' 'lcs' string (default "eol:$")
4016 global
4017 {not in Vi}
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00004018 Strings to use in 'list' mode. It is a comma separated list of string
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004019 settings.
4020 eol:c Character to show at the end of each line. When
4021 omitted, there is no extra character at the end of the
4022 line.
4023 tab:xy Two characters to be used to show a Tab. The first
4024 char is used once. The second char is repeated to
4025 fill the space that the Tab normally occupies.
4026 "tab:>-" will show a Tab that takes four spaces as
4027 ">---". When omitted, a Tab is show as ^I.
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00004028 trail:c Character to show for trailing spaces. When omitted,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004029 trailing spaces are blank.
4030 extends:c Character to show in the last column, when 'wrap' is
4031 off and the line continues beyond the right of the
4032 screen.
4033 precedes:c Character to show in the first column, when 'wrap'
4034 is off and there is text preceding the character
4035 visible in the first column.
Bram Moolenaar592e0a22004-07-03 16:05:59 +00004036 nbsp:c Character to show for a non-breakable space (character
4037 0xA0, 160). Left blank when omitted.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004038
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00004039 The characters ':' and ',' should not be used. UTF-8 characters can
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004040 be used when 'encoding' is "utf-8", otherwise only printable
4041 characters are allowed.
4042
4043 Examples: >
4044 :set lcs=tab:>-,trail:-
Bram Moolenaarcfbc5ee2004-07-02 15:38:35 +00004045 :set lcs=tab:>-,eol:<,nbsp:%
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004046 :set lcs=extends:>,precedes:<
4047< The "NonText" highlighting will be used for "eol", "extends" and
Bram Moolenaarcfbc5ee2004-07-02 15:38:35 +00004048 "precedes". "SpecialKey" for "nbsp", "tab" and "trail".
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004049
4050 *'lpl'* *'nolpl'* *'loadplugins'* *'noloadplugins'*
4051'loadplugins' 'lpl' boolean (default on)
4052 global
4053 {not in Vi}
4054 When on the plugin scripts are loaded when starting up |load-plugins|.
4055 This option can be reset in your |vimrc| file to disable the loading
4056 of plugins.
4057 Note that using the "-u NONE" and "--noplugin" command line arguments
4058 reset this option. |-u| |--noplugin|
4059
4060 *'magic'* *'nomagic'*
4061'magic' boolean (default on)
4062 global
4063 Changes the special characters that can be used in search patterns.
4064 See |pattern|.
4065 NOTE: To avoid portability problems with using patterns, always keep
4066 this option at the default "on". Only switch it off when working with
4067 old Vi scripts. In any other situation write patterns that work when
Bram Moolenaar5eb86f92004-07-26 12:53:41 +00004068 'magic' is on. Include "\M" when you want to |/\M|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004069
4070 *'makeef'* *'mef'*
4071'makeef' 'mef' string (default: "")
4072 global
4073 {not in Vi}
4074 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
4075 feature}
4076 Name of the errorfile for the |:make| command (see |:make_makeprg|)
4077 and the |:grep| command.
4078 When it is empty, an internally generated temp file will be used.
4079 When "##" is included, it is replaced by a number to make the name
4080 unique. This makes sure that the ":make" command doesn't overwrite an
4081 existing file.
4082 NOT used for the ":cf" command. See 'errorfile' for that.
4083 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
4084 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
4085 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
4086 security reasons.
4087
4088 *'makeprg'* *'mp'*
4089'makeprg' 'mp' string (default "make", VMS: "MMS")
4090 global or local to buffer |global-local|
4091 {not in Vi}
4092 Program to use for the ":make" command. See |:make_makeprg|. This
4093 option may contain '%' and '#' characters, which are expanded like
4094 when used in a command-line. Environment variables are expanded
4095 |:set_env|. See |option-backslash| about including spaces and
4096 backslashes. Note that a '|' must be escaped twice: once for ":set"
4097 and once for the interpretation of a command. When you use a filter
4098 called "myfilter" do it like this: >
4099 :set makeprg=gmake\ \\\|\ myfilter
4100< The placeholder "$*" can be given (even multiple times) to specify
4101 where the arguments will be included, for example: >
4102 :set makeprg=latex\ \\\\nonstopmode\ \\\\input\\{$*}
4103< This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
4104 security reasons.
4105
4106 *'matchpairs'* *'mps'*
4107'matchpairs' 'mps' string (default "(:),{:},[:]")
4108 local to buffer
4109 {not in Vi}
4110 Characters that form pairs. The |%| command jumps from one to the
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00004111 other. Currently only single character pairs are allowed, and they
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004112 must be different. The characters must be separated by a colon. The
4113 pairs must be separated by a comma. Example for including '<' and '>'
4114 (HTML): >
4115 :set mps+=<:>
4116
4117< A more exotic example, to jump between the '=' and ';' in an
4118 assignment, useful for languages like C and Java: >
4119 :au FileType c,cpp,java set mps+==:;
4120
4121< For a more advanced way of using "%", see the matchit.vim plugin in
4122 the $VIMRUNTIME/macros directory. |add-local-help|
4123
4124 *'matchtime'* *'mat'*
4125'matchtime' 'mat' number (default 5)
4126 global
4127 {not in Vi}{in Nvi}
4128 Tenths of a second to show the matching paren, when 'showmatch' is
4129 set. Note that this is not in milliseconds, like other options that
4130 set a time. This is to be compatible with Nvi.
4131
4132 *'maxfuncdepth'* *'mfd'*
4133'maxfuncdepth' 'mfd' number (default 100)
4134 global
4135 {not in Vi}
4136 Maximum depth of function calls for user functions. This normally
4137 catches endless recursion. When using a recursive function with
4138 more depth, set 'maxfuncdepth' to a bigger number. But this will use
4139 more memory, there is the danger of failing when memory is exhausted.
4140 See also |:function|.
4141
4142 *'maxmapdepth'* *'mmd'* *E223*
4143'maxmapdepth' 'mmd' number (default 1000)
4144 global
4145 {not in Vi}
4146 Maximum number of times a mapping is done without resulting in a
4147 character to be used. This normally catches endless mappings, like
4148 ":map x y" with ":map y x". It still does not catch ":map g wg",
4149 because the 'w' is used before the next mapping is done. See also
4150 |key-mapping|.
4151
4152 *'maxmem'* *'mm'*
4153'maxmem' 'mm' number (default between 256 to 5120 (system
4154 dependent) or half the amount of memory
4155 available)
4156 global
4157 {not in Vi}
4158 Maximum amount of memory (in Kbyte) to use for one buffer. When this
4159 limit is reached allocating extra memory for a buffer will cause
4160 other memory to be freed. Maximum value 2000000. Use this to work
4161 without a limit. Also see 'maxmemtot'.
4162
4163 *'maxmemtot'* *'mmt'*
4164'maxmemtot' 'mmt' number (default between 2048 and 10240 (system
4165 dependent) or half the amount of memory
4166 available)
4167 global
4168 {not in Vi}
4169 Maximum amount of memory (in Kbyte) to use for all buffers together.
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00004170 Maximum value 2000000. Use this to work without a limit. Also see
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004171 'maxmem'.
4172
4173 *'menuitems'* *'mis'*
4174'menuitems' 'mis' number (default 25)
4175 global
4176 {not in Vi}
4177 {not available when compiled without the |+menu|
4178 feature}
4179 Maximum number of items to use in a menu. Used for menus that are
4180 generated from a list of items, e.g., the Buffers menu. Changing this
4181 option has no direct effect, the menu must be refreshed first.
4182
4183 *'modeline'* *'ml'* *'nomodeline'* *'noml'*
4184'modeline' 'ml' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
4185 local to buffer
4186 *'modelines'* *'mls'*
4187'modelines' 'mls' number (default 5)
4188 global
4189 {not in Vi}
4190 If 'modeline' is on 'modelines' gives the number of lines that is
4191 checked for set commands. If 'modeline' is off or 'modelines' is zero
4192 no lines are checked. See |modeline|.
4193 NOTE: 'modeline' is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
4194 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
4195
4196 *'modifiable'* *'ma'* *'nomodifiable'* *'noma'*
4197'modifiable' 'ma' boolean (default on)
4198 local to buffer
4199 {not in Vi} *E21*
4200 When off the buffer contents cannot be changed. The 'fileformat' and
4201 'fileencoding' options also can't be changed.
4202 Can be reset with the |-M| command line argument.
4203
4204 *'modified'* *'mod'* *'nomodified'* *'nomod'*
4205'modified' 'mod' boolean (default off)
4206 local to buffer
4207 {not in Vi}
4208 When on, the buffer is considered to be modified. This option is set
4209 when:
4210 1. A change was made to the text since it was last written. Using the
4211 |undo| command to go back to the original text will reset the
4212 option. But undoing changes that were made before writing the
4213 buffer will set the option again, since the text is different from
4214 when it was written.
4215 2. 'fileformat' or 'fileencoding' is different from its original
4216 value. The original value is set when the buffer is read or
4217 written. A ":set nomodified" command also resets the original
4218 values to the current values and the 'modified' option will be
4219 reset.
4220 When 'buftype' is "nowrite" or "nofile" this option may be set, but
4221 will be ignored.
4222
4223 *'more'* *'nomore'*
4224'more' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
4225 global
4226 {not in Vi}
4227 When on, listings pause when the whole screen is filled. You will get
4228 the |more-prompt|. When this option is off there are no pauses, the
4229 listing continues until finished.
4230 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
4231 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
4232
4233 *'mouse'* *E538*
4234'mouse' string (default "", "a" for GUI, MS-DOS and Win32)
4235 global
4236 {not in Vi}
4237 Enable the use of the mouse. Only works for certain terminals
4238 (xterm, MS-DOS, Win32 |win32-mouse|, QNX pterm, and Linux console
4239 with gpm). For using the mouse in the GUI, see |gui-mouse|.
4240 The mouse can be enabled for different modes:
4241 n Normal mode
4242 v Visual mode
4243 i Insert mode
4244 c Command-line mode
4245 h all previous modes when editing a help file
4246 a all previous modes
4247 r for |hit-enter| and |more-prompt| prompt
4248 A auto-select in Visual mode
4249 Normally you would enable the mouse in all four modes with: >
4250 :set mouse=a
4251< When the mouse is not enabled, the GUI will still use the mouse for
4252 modeless selection. This doesn't move the text cursor.
4253
4254 See |mouse-using|. Also see |'clipboard'|.
4255
4256 Note: When enabling the mouse in a terminal, copy/paste will use the
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00004257 "* register if there is access to an X-server. The xterm handling of
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004258 the mouse buttons can still be used by keeping the shift key pressed.
4259 Also see the 'clipboard' option.
4260
4261 *'mousefocus'* *'mousef'* *'nomousefocus'* *'nomousef'*
4262'mousefocus' 'mousef' boolean (default off)
4263 global
4264 {not in Vi}
4265 {only works in the GUI}
4266 The window that the mouse pointer is on is automatically activated.
4267 When changing the window layout or window focus in another way, the
4268 mouse pointer is moved to the window with keyboard focus. Off is the
4269 default because it makes using the pull down menus a little goofy, as
4270 a pointer transit may activate a window unintentionally.
4271
4272 *'mousehide'* *'mh'* *'nomousehide'* *'nomh'*
4273'mousehide' 'mh' boolean (default on)
4274 global
4275 {not in Vi}
4276 {only works in the GUI}
4277 When on, the mouse pointer is hidden when characters are typed.
4278 The mouse pointer is restored when the mouse is moved.
4279
4280 *'mousemodel'* *'mousem'*
4281'mousemodel' 'mousem' string (default "extend", "popup" for MS-DOS and Win32)
4282 global
4283 {not in Vi}
4284 Sets the model to use for the mouse. The name mostly specifies what
4285 the right mouse button is used for:
4286 extend Right mouse button extends a selection. This works
4287 like in an xterm.
4288 popup Right mouse button pops up a menu. The shifted left
4289 mouse button extends a selection. This works like
4290 with Microsoft Windows
4291 popup_setpos Like "popup", but the cursor will be moved to the
4292 position where the mouse was clicked, and thus the
4293 selected operation will act upon the clicked object.
4294 If clicking inside a selection, that selection will
4295 be acted upon, ie. no cursor move. This implies of
4296 course, that right clicking outside a selection will
4297 end Visual mode.
4298 Overview of what button does what for each model:
4299 mouse extend popup(_setpos) ~
4300 left click place cursor place cursor
4301 left drag start selection start selection
4302 shift-left search word extend selection
4303 right click extend selection popup menu (place cursor)
4304 right drag extend selection -
4305 middle click paste paste
4306
4307 In the "popup" model the right mouse button produces a pop-up menu.
4308 You need to define this first, see |popup-menu|.
4309
4310 Note that you can further refine the meaning of buttons with mappings.
4311 See |gui-mouse-mapping|. But mappings are NOT used for modeless
4312 selection (because that's handled in the GUI code directly).
4313
4314 The 'mousemodel' option is set by the |:behave| command.
4315
4316 *'mouseshape'* *'mouses'* *E547*
4317'mouseshape' 'mouses' string (default "i:beam,r:beam,s:updown,sd:cross,
4318 m:no,ml:up-arrow,v:rightup-arrow"
4319 global
4320 {not in Vi}
4321 {only available when compiled with the |+mouseshape|
4322 feature}
4323 This option tells Vim what the mouse pointer should look like in
4324 different modes. The option is a comma separated list of parts, much
4325 like used for 'guicursor'. Each part consist of a mode/location-list
4326 and an argument-list:
4327 mode-list:shape,mode-list:shape,..
4328 The mode-list is a dash separated list of these modes/locations:
4329 In a normal window: ~
4330 n Normal mode
4331 v Visual mode
4332 ve Visual mode with 'selection' "exclusive" (same as 'v',
4333 if not specified)
4334 o Operator-pending mode
4335 i Insert mode
4336 r Replace mode
4337
4338 Others: ~
4339 c appending to the command-line
4340 ci inserting in the command-line
4341 cr replacing in the command-line
4342 m at the 'Hit ENTER' or 'More' prompts
4343 ml idem, but cursor in the last line
4344 e any mode, pointer below last window
4345 s any mode, pointer on a status line
4346 sd any mode, while dragging a status line
4347 vs any mode, pointer on a vertical separator line
4348 vd any mode, while dragging a vertical separator line
4349 a everywhere
4350
4351 The shape is one of the following:
4352 avail name looks like ~
4353 w x arrow Normal mouse pointer
4354 w x blank no pointer at all (use with care!)
4355 w x beam I-beam
4356 w x updown up-down sizing arrows
4357 w x leftright left-right sizing arrows
4358 w x busy The system's usual busy pointer
4359 w x no The system's usual 'no input' pointer
4360 x udsizing indicates up-down resizing
4361 x lrsizing indicates left-right resizing
4362 x crosshair like a big thin +
4363 x hand1 black hand
4364 x hand2 white hand
4365 x pencil what you write with
4366 x question big ?
4367 x rightup-arrow arrow pointing right-up
4368 w x up-arrow arrow pointing up
4369 x <number> any X11 pointer number (see X11/cursorfont.h)
4370
4371 The "avail" column contains a 'w' if the shape is available for Win32,
4372 x for X11.
4373 Any modes not specified or shapes not available use the normal mouse
4374 pointer.
4375
4376 Example: >
4377 :set mouseshape=s:udsizing,m:no
4378< will make the mouse turn to a sizing arrow over the status lines and
4379 indicate no input when the hit-enter prompt is displayed (since
4380 clicking the mouse has no effect in this state.)
4381
4382 *'mousetime'* *'mouset'*
4383'mousetime' 'mouset' number (default 500)
4384 global
4385 {not in Vi}
4386 Only for GUI, MS-DOS, Win32 and Unix with xterm. Defines the maximum
4387 time in msec between two mouse clicks for the second click to be
4388 recognized as a multi click.
4389
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00004390 *'mzquantum'* *'mzq'*
4391'mzquantum' 'mzq' number (default 100)
4392 global
4393 {not in Vi}
4394 {not available when compiled without the |+mzscheme|
4395 feature}
4396 The number of milliseconds between polls for MzScheme threads.
4397 Negative or zero value means no thread scheduling.
4398
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004399 *'nrformats'* *'nf'*
4400'nrformats' 'nf' string (default "octal,hex")
4401 local to buffer
4402 {not in Vi}
4403 This defines what bases Vim will consider for numbers when using the
4404 CTRL-A and CTRL-X commands for adding to and subtracting from a number
4405 respectively; see |CTRL-A| for more info on these commands.
4406 alpha if included, single alphabetical characters will be
4407 incremented or decremented. This is useful for a list with a
4408 letter index a), b), etc.
4409 octal if included, numbers that start with a zero will be considered
4410 to be octal. Example: Using CTRL-A on "007" results in "010".
4411 hex if included, numbers starting with "0x" or "0X" will be
4412 considered to be hexadecimal. Example: Using CTRL-X on
4413 "0x100" results in "0x0ff".
4414 Numbers which simply begin with a digit in the range 1-9 are always
4415 considered decimal. This also happens for numbers that are not
4416 recognized as octal or hex.
4417
4418 *'number'* *'nu'* *'nonumber'* *'nonu'*
4419'number' 'nu' boolean (default off)
4420 local to window
4421 Print the line number in front of each line. When the 'n' option is
4422 excluded from 'cpoptions' a wrapped line will not use the column of
4423 line numbers (this is the default when 'compatible' isn't set).
Bram Moolenaar592e0a22004-07-03 16:05:59 +00004424 The 'numberwidth' option can be used to set the room used for the line
4425 number.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004426 When a long, wrapped line doesn't start with the first character, '-'
4427 characters are put before the number.
4428 See |hl-LineNr| for the highlighting used for the number.
4429
Bram Moolenaar592e0a22004-07-03 16:05:59 +00004430 *'numberwidth'* *'nuw'*
4431'numberwidth' 'nuw' number (Vim default: 4 Vi default: 8)
4432 local to window
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00004433 {not in Vi}
4434 {only available when compiled with the |+linebreak|
4435 feature}
Bram Moolenaar592e0a22004-07-03 16:05:59 +00004436 Minimal number of columns to use for the line number. Only relevant
4437 when the 'number' option is set.
4438 Since one space is always between the number and the text, there is
4439 one less character for the number itself.
4440 The value is the minimum width. A bigger width is used when needed to
4441 fit the highest line number in the buffer. Thus with the Vim default
4442 of 4 there is room for a line number up to 999. When the buffer has
4443 1000 lines five columns will be used.
4444 The minimum value is 1, the maximum value is 10.
4445 NOTE: 'numberwidth' is reset to 8 when 'compatible' is set.
4446
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004447 *'osfiletype'* *'oft'* *E366*
4448'osfiletype' 'oft' string (RISC-OS default: "Text",
4449 others default: "")
4450 local to buffer
4451 {not in Vi}
4452 {only available when compiled with the |+osfiletype|
4453 feature}
4454 Some operating systems store extra information about files besides
4455 name, datestamp and permissions. This option contains the extra
4456 information, the nature of which will vary between systems.
4457 The value of this option is usually set when the file is loaded, and
4458 use to set the file type when file is written.
4459 It can affect the pattern matching of the automatic commands.
4460 |autocmd-osfiletypes|
4461
4462 *'paragraphs'* *'para'*
4463'paragraphs' 'para' string (default "IPLPPPQPP LIpplpipbp")
4464 global
4465 Specifies the nroff macros that separate paragraphs. These are pairs
4466 of two letters (see |object-motions|).
4467
4468 *'paste'* *'nopaste'*
4469'paste' boolean (default off)
4470 global
4471 {not in Vi}
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00004472 Put Vim in Paste mode. This is useful if you want to cut or copy
4473 some text from one window and paste it in Vim. This will avoid
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004474 unexpected effects.
4475 Setting this option is useful when using Vim in a terminal, where Vim
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00004476 cannot distinguish between typed text and pasted text. In the GUI, Vim
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004477 knows about pasting and will mostly do the right thing without 'paste'
4478 being set. The same is true for a terminal where Vim handles the
4479 mouse clicks itself.
Bram Moolenaar2ce06f62005-01-31 19:19:04 +00004480 This option is reset when starting the GUI. Thus if you set it in
4481 your .vimrc it will work in a terminal, but not in the GUI. Setting
4482 'paste' in the GUI has side effects: e.g., the Paste toolbar button
4483 will no longer work in Insert mode, because it uses a mapping.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004484 When the 'paste' option is switched on (also when it was already on):
4485 - mapping in Insert mode and Command-line mode is disabled
4486 - abbreviations are disabled
4487 - 'textwidth' is set to 0
4488 - 'wrapmargin' is set to 0
4489 - 'autoindent' is reset
4490 - 'smartindent' is reset
4491 - 'softtabstop' is set to 0
4492 - 'revins' is reset
4493 - 'ruler' is reset
4494 - 'showmatch' is reset
4495 - 'formatoptions' is used like it is empty
4496 These options keep their value, but their effect is disabled:
4497 - 'lisp'
4498 - 'indentexpr'
4499 - 'cindent'
4500 NOTE: When you start editing another file while the 'paste' option is
4501 on, settings from the modelines or autocommands may change the
4502 settings again, causing trouble when pasting text. You might want to
4503 set the 'paste' option again.
4504 When the 'paste' option is reset the mentioned options are restored to
4505 the value before the moment 'paste' was switched from off to on.
4506 Resetting 'paste' before ever setting it does not have any effect.
4507 Since mapping doesn't work while 'paste' is active, you need to use
4508 the 'pastetoggle' option to toggle the 'paste' option with some key.
4509
4510 *'pastetoggle'* *'pt'*
4511'pastetoggle' 'pt' string (default "")
4512 global
4513 {not in Vi}
4514 When non-empty, specifies the key sequence that toggles the 'paste'
4515 option. This is like specifying a mapping: >
4516 :map {keys} :set invpaste<CR>
4517< Where {keys} is the value of 'pastetoggle'.
4518 The difference is that it will work even when 'paste' is set.
4519 'pastetoggle' works in Insert mode and Normal mode, but not in
4520 Command-line mode.
4521 Mappings are checked first, thus overrule 'pastetoggle'. However,
4522 when 'paste' is on mappings are ignored in Insert mode, thus you can do
4523 this: >
4524 :map <F10> :set paste<CR>
4525 :map <F11> :set nopaste<CR>
4526 :imap <F10> <C-O>:set paste<CR>
4527 :imap <F11> <nop>
4528 :set pastetoggle=<F11>
4529< This will make <F10> start paste mode and <F11> stop paste mode.
4530 Note that typing <F10> in paste mode inserts "<F10>", since in paste
4531 mode everything is inserted literally, except the 'pastetoggle' key
4532 sequence.
4533
4534 *'pex'* *'patchexpr'*
4535'patchexpr' 'pex' string (default "")
4536 global
4537 {not in Vi}
4538 {not available when compiled without the |+diff|
4539 feature}
4540 Expression which is evaluated to apply a patch to a file and generate
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00004541 the resulting new version of the file. See |diff-patchexpr|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004542
4543 *'patchmode'* *'pm'* *E206*
4544'patchmode' 'pm' string (default "")
4545 global
4546 {not in Vi}
4547 When non-empty the oldest version of a file is kept. This can be used
4548 to keep the original version of a file if you are changing files in a
4549 source distribution. Only the first time that a file is written a
4550 copy of the original file will be kept. The name of the copy is the
4551 name of the original file with the string in the 'patchmode' option
4552 appended. This option should start with a dot. Use a string like
4553 ".org". 'backupdir' must not be empty for this to work (Detail: The
4554 backup file is renamed to the patchmode file after the new file has
4555 been successfully written, that's why it must be possible to write a
4556 backup file). If there was no file to be backed up, an empty file is
4557 created.
4558 When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a patchmode file is not made.
4559 Using 'patchmode' for compressed files appends the extension at the
4560 end (e.g., "file.gz.orig"), thus the resulting name isn't always
4561 recognized as a compressed file.
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +00004562 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004563
4564 *'path'* *'pa'* *E343* *E345* *E347*
4565'path' 'pa' string (default on Unix: ".,/usr/include,,"
4566 on OS/2: ".,/emx/include,,"
4567 other systems: ".,,")
4568 global or local to buffer |global-local|
4569 {not in Vi}
4570 This is a list of directories which will be searched when using the
4571 |gf|, [f, ]f, ^Wf, |:find| and other commands, provided that the file
4572 being searched for has a relative path (not starting with '/'). The
4573 directories in the 'path' option may be relative or absolute.
4574 - Use commas to separate directory names: >
4575 :set path=.,/usr/local/include,/usr/include
4576< - Spaces can also be used to separate directory names (for backwards
4577 compatibility with version 3.0). To have a space in a directory
4578 name, precede it with an extra backslash, and escape the space: >
4579 :set path=.,/dir/with\\\ space
4580< - To include a comma in a directory name precede it with an extra
4581 backslash: >
4582 :set path=.,/dir/with\\,comma
4583< - To search relative to the directory of the current file, use: >
4584 :set path=.
4585< - To search in the current directory use an empty string between two
4586 commas: >
4587 :set path=,,
4588< - A directory name may end in a ':' or '/'.
4589 - Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
4590 - When using |netrw.vim| URLs can be used. For example, adding
4591 "http://www.vim.org" will make ":find index.html" work.
4592 - Search upwards and downwards in a directory tree:
4593 1) "*" matches a sequence of characters, e.g.: >
4594 :set path=/usr/include/*
4595< means all subdirectories in /usr/include (but not /usr/include
4596 itself). >
4597 :set path=/usr/*c
4598< matches /usr/doc and /usr/src.
4599 2) "**" matches a subtree, up to 100 directories deep. Example: >
4600 :set path=/home/user_x/src/**
4601< means search in the whole subtree under "/home/usr_x/src".
4602 3) If the path ends with a ';', this path is the startpoint
4603 for upward search.
4604 See |file-searching| for more info and exact syntax.
4605 {not available when compiled without the |+path_extra| feature}
4606 - Careful with '\' characters, type two to get one in the option: >
4607 :set path=.,c:\\include
4608< Or just use '/' instead: >
4609 :set path=.,c:/include
4610< Don't forget "." or files won't even be found in the same directory as
4611 the file!
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00004612 The maximum length is limited. How much depends on the system, mostly
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004613 it is something like 256 or 1024 characters.
4614 You can check if all the include files are found, using the value of
4615 'path', see |:checkpath|.
4616 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
4617 directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version
4618 uses another default. To remove the current directory use: >
4619 :set path-=
4620< To add the current directory use: >
4621 :set path+=
4622< To use an environment variable, you probably need to replace the
4623 separator. Here is an example to append $INCL, in which directory
4624 names are separated with a semi-colon: >
4625 :let &path = &path . "," . substitute($INCL, ';', ',', 'g')
4626< Replace the ';' with a ':' or whatever separator is used. Note that
4627 this doesn't work when $INCL contains a comma or white space.
4628
4629 *'preserveindent'* *'pi'* *'nopreserveindent'* *'nopi'*
4630'preserveindent' 'pi' boolean (default off)
4631 local to buffer
4632 {not in Vi}
4633 When changing the indent of the current line, preserve as much of the
4634 indent structure as possible. Normally the indent is replaced by a
4635 series of tabs followed by spaces as required (unless |'expandtab'| is
4636 enabled, in which case only spaces are used). Enabling this option
4637 means the indent will preserve as many existing characters as possible
4638 for indenting, and only add additional tabs or spaces as required.
4639 NOTE: When using ">>" multiple times the resulting indent is a mix of
4640 tabs and spaces. You might not like this.
4641 NOTE: 'preserveindent' is reset when 'compatible' is set.
4642 Also see 'copyindent'.
4643 Use |:retab| to clean up white space.
4644
4645 *'previewheight'* *'pvh'*
4646'previewheight' 'pvh' number (default 12)
4647 global
4648 {not in Vi}
4649 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| or
4650 |+quickfix| feature}
4651 Default height for a preview window. Used for |:ptag| and associated
4652 commands. Used for |CTRL-W_}| when no count is given.
4653
4654 *'previewwindow'* *'nopreviewwindow'*
4655 *'pvw'* *'nopvw'* *E590*
4656'previewwindow' 'pvw' boolean (default off)
4657 local to window
4658 {not in Vi}
4659 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| or
4660 |+quickfix| feature}
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00004661 Identifies the preview window. Only one window can have this option
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004662 set. It's normally not set directly, but by using one of the commands
4663 |:ptag|, |:pedit|, etc.
4664
4665 *'printdevice'* *'pdev'*
4666'printdevice' 'pdev' string (default empty)
4667 global
4668 {not in Vi}
4669 {only available when compiled with the |+printer|
4670 feature}
Bram Moolenaar8299df92004-07-10 09:47:34 +00004671 The name of the printer to be used for |:hardcopy|.
4672 See |pdev-option|.
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +00004673 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
4674 security reasons.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004675
Bram Moolenaar8299df92004-07-10 09:47:34 +00004676 *'printencoding'* *'penc'*
4677'printencoding' 'penc' String (default empty, except for some systems)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004678 global
4679 {not in Vi}
4680 {only available when compiled with the |+printer|
4681 and |+postscript| features}
Bram Moolenaar8299df92004-07-10 09:47:34 +00004682 Sets the character encoding used when printing.
4683 See |penc-option|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004684
4685 *'printexpr'* *'pexpr'*
4686'printexpr' 'pexpr' String (default: see below)
4687 global
4688 {not in Vi}
4689 {only available when compiled with the |+printer|
4690 and |+postscript| features}
Bram Moolenaar8299df92004-07-10 09:47:34 +00004691 Expression used to print the PostScript produced with |:hardcopy|.
4692 See |pexpr-option|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004693
Bram Moolenaar8299df92004-07-10 09:47:34 +00004694 *'printfont'* *'pfn'*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004695'printfont' 'pfn' string (default "courier")
4696 global
4697 {not in Vi}
4698 {only available when compiled with the |+printer|
4699 feature}
Bram Moolenaar8299df92004-07-10 09:47:34 +00004700 The name of the font that will be used for |:hardcopy|.
4701 See |pfn-option|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004702
4703 *'printheader'* *'pheader'*
4704'printheader' 'pheader' string (default "%<%f%h%m%=Page %N")
4705 global
4706 {not in Vi}
4707 {only available when compiled with the |+printer|
4708 feature}
Bram Moolenaar8299df92004-07-10 09:47:34 +00004709 The format of the header produced in |:hardcopy| output.
4710 See |pheader-option|.
4711
4712 *'printmbcharset'* *'pmbcs'*
4713'printmbcharset' 'pmbcs' string (default "")
4714 global
4715 {not in Vi}
Bram Moolenaarbc7aa852005-03-06 23:38:09 +00004716 {only available when compiled with the |+printer|,
4717 |+postscript| and |+multi_byte| features}
Bram Moolenaar8299df92004-07-10 09:47:34 +00004718 The CJK character set to be used for CJK output from |:hardcopy|.
4719 See |pmbcs-option|.
4720
4721 *'printmbfont'* *'pmbfn'*
4722'printmbfont' 'pmbfn' string (default "")
4723 global
4724 {not in Vi}
Bram Moolenaarbc7aa852005-03-06 23:38:09 +00004725 {only available when compiled with the |+printer|,
4726 |+postscript| and |+multi_byte| features}
Bram Moolenaar8299df92004-07-10 09:47:34 +00004727 List of font names to be used for CJK output from |:hardcopy|.
4728 See |pmbfn-option|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004729
4730 *'printoptions'* *'popt'*
4731'printoptions' 'popt' string (default "")
4732 global
4733 {not in Vi}
4734 {only available when compiled with |+printer| feature}
Bram Moolenaar8299df92004-07-10 09:47:34 +00004735 List of items that control the format of the output of |:hardcopy|.
4736 See |popt-option|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004737
Bram Moolenaar26a60b42005-02-22 08:49:11 +00004738 *'prompt'* *'noprompt'*
4739'prompt' boolean (default on)
4740 global
4741 When on a ":" prompt is used in Ex mode.
4742
Bram Moolenaar677ee682005-01-27 14:41:15 +00004743 *'quoteescape'* *'qe'*
Bram Moolenaarcfbc5ee2004-07-02 15:38:35 +00004744'quoteescape' 'qe' string (default "\")
4745 local to buffer
4746 {not in Vi}
4747 The characters that are used to escape quotes in a string. Used for
4748 objects like a', a" and a` |a'|.
4749 When one of the characters in this option is found inside a string,
4750 the following character will be skipped. The default value makes the
4751 text "foo\"bar\\" considered to be one string.
4752
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004753 *'readonly'* *'ro'* *'noreadonly'* *'noro'*
4754'readonly' 'ro' boolean (default off)
4755 local to buffer
4756 If on, writes fail unless you use a '!'. Protects you from
4757 accidentally overwriting a file. Default on when Vim is started
4758 in read-only mode ("vim -R") or when the executable is called "view".
Bram Moolenaar4399ef42005-02-12 14:29:27 +00004759 When using ":w!" the 'readonly' option is reset for the current
4760 buffer, unless the 'Z' flag is in 'cpoptions'.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004761 {not in Vi:} When using the ":view" command the 'readonly' option is
Bram Moolenaar4399ef42005-02-12 14:29:27 +00004762 set for the newly edited buffer.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004763
4764 *'remap'* *'noremap'*
4765'remap' boolean (default on)
4766 global
4767 Allows for mappings to work recursively. If you do not want this for
4768 a single entry, use the :noremap[!] command.
4769
4770 *'report'*
4771'report' number (default 2)
4772 global
4773 Threshold for reporting number of lines changed. When the number of
4774 changed lines is more than 'report' a message will be given for most
4775 ":" commands. If you want it always, set 'report' to 0.
4776 For the ":substitute" command the number of substitutions is used
4777 instead of the number of lines.
4778
4779 *'restorescreen'* *'rs'* *'norestorescreen'* *'nors'*
4780'restorescreen' 'rs' boolean (default on)
4781 global
4782 {not in Vi} {only in Windows 95/NT console version}
4783 When set, the screen contents is restored when exiting Vim. This also
4784 happens when executing external commands.
4785
4786 For non-Windows Vim: You can set or reset the 't_ti' and 't_te'
4787 options in your .vimrc. To disable restoring:
4788 set t_ti= t_te=
4789 To enable restoring (for an xterm):
4790 set t_ti=^[7^[[r^[[?47h t_te=^[[?47l^[8
4791 (Where ^[ is an <Esc>, type CTRL-V <Esc> to insert it)
4792
4793 *'revins'* *'ri'* *'norevins'* *'nori'*
4794'revins' 'ri' boolean (default off)
4795 global
4796 {not in Vi}
4797 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
4798 feature}
4799 Inserting characters in Insert mode will work backwards. See "typing
4800 backwards" |ins-reverse|. This option can be toggled with the CTRL-_
4801 command in Insert mode, when 'allowrevins' is set.
4802 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' or 'paste' is set.
4803
4804 *'rightleft'* *'rl'* *'norightleft'* *'norl'*
4805'rightleft' 'rl' boolean (default off)
4806 local to window
4807 {not in Vi}
4808 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
4809 feature}
4810 When on, display orientation becomes right-to-left, i.e., characters
4811 that are stored in the file appear from the right to the left.
4812 Using this option, it is possible to edit files for languages that
4813 are written from the right to the left such as Hebrew and Arabic.
4814 This option is per window, so it is possible to edit mixed files
4815 simultaneously, or to view the same file in both ways (this is
4816 useful whenever you have a mixed text file with both right-to-left
4817 and left-to-right strings so that both sets are displayed properly
4818 in different windows). Also see |rileft.txt|.
4819
4820 *'rightleftcmd'* *'rlc'* *'norightleftcmd'* *'norlc'*
4821'rightleftcmd' 'rlc' string (default "search")
4822 local to window
4823 {not in Vi}
4824 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
4825 feature}
4826 Each word in this option enables the command line editing to work in
4827 right-to-left mode for a group of commands:
4828
4829 search "/" and "?" commands
4830
4831 This is useful for languages such as Hebrew, Arabic and Farsi.
4832 The 'rightleft' option must be set for 'rightleftcmd' to take effect.
4833
4834 *'ruler'* *'ru'* *'noruler'* *'noru'*
4835'ruler' 'ru' boolean (default off)
4836 global
4837 {not in Vi}
4838 {not available when compiled without the
4839 |+cmdline_info| feature}
4840 Show the line and column number of the cursor position, separated by a
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00004841 comma. When there is room, the relative position of the displayed
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004842 text in the file is shown on the far right:
4843 Top first line is visible
4844 Bot last line is visible
4845 All first and last line are visible
4846 45% relative position in the file
4847 If 'rulerformat' is set, it will determine the contents of the ruler.
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00004848 Each window has its own ruler. If a window has a status line, the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004849 ruler is shown there. Otherwise it is shown in the last line of the
4850 screen. If the statusline is given by 'statusline' (ie. not empty),
4851 this option takes precedence over 'ruler' and 'rulerformat'
4852 If the number of characters displayed is different from the number of
4853 bytes in the text (e.g., for a TAB or a multi-byte character), both
4854 the text column (byte number) and the screen column are shown,
4855 separated with a dash.
4856 For an empty line "0-1" is shown.
4857 For an empty buffer the line number will also be zero: "0,0-1".
4858 This option is reset when the 'paste' option is set.
4859 If you don't want to see the ruler all the time but want to know where
4860 you are, use "g CTRL-G" |g_CTRL-G|.
4861 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
4862
4863 *'rulerformat'* *'ruf'*
4864'rulerformat' 'ruf' string (default empty)
4865 global
4866 {not in Vi}
4867 {not available when compiled without the |+statusline|
4868 feature}
4869 When this option is not empty, it determines the content of the ruler
4870 string, as displayed for the 'ruler' option.
4871 The format of this option, is like that of 'statusline'.
4872 The default ruler width is 17 characters. To make the ruler 15
4873 characters wide, put "%15(" at the start and "%)" at the end.
4874 Example: >
4875 :set rulerformat=%15(%c%V\ %p%%%)
4876<
4877 *'runtimepath'* *'rtp'* *vimfiles*
4878'runtimepath' 'rtp' string (default:
4879 Unix: "$HOME/.vim,
4880 $VIM/vimfiles,
4881 $VIMRUNTIME,
4882 $VIM/vimfiles/after,
4883 $HOME/.vim/after"
4884 Amiga: "home:vimfiles,
4885 $VIM/vimfiles,
4886 $VIMRUNTIME,
4887 $VIM/vimfiles/after,
4888 home:vimfiles/after"
4889 PC, OS/2: "$HOME/vimfiles,
4890 $VIM/vimfiles,
4891 $VIMRUNTIME,
4892 $VIM/vimfiles/after,
4893 $HOME/vimfiles/after"
4894 Macintosh: "$VIM:vimfiles,
4895 $VIMRUNTIME,
4896 $VIM:vimfiles:after"
4897 RISC-OS: "Choices:vimfiles,
4898 $VIMRUNTIME,
4899 Choices:vimfiles/after"
4900 VMS: "sys$login:vimfiles,
4901 $VIM/vimfiles,
4902 $VIMRUNTIME,
4903 $VIM/vimfiles/after,
4904 sys$login:vimfiles/after"
4905 global
4906 {not in Vi}
4907 This is a list of directories which will be searched for runtime
4908 files:
4909 filetype.vim filetypes by file name |new-filetype|
4910 scripts.vim filetypes by file contents |new-filetype-scripts|
Bram Moolenaar4399ef42005-02-12 14:29:27 +00004911 autoload/ automatically loaded scripts |autoload-functions|
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004912 colors/ color scheme files |:colorscheme|
4913 compiler/ compiler files |:compiler|
4914 doc/ documentation |write-local-help|
4915 ftplugin/ filetype plugins |write-filetype-plugin|
4916 indent/ indent scripts |indent-expression|
4917 keymap/ key mapping files |mbyte-keymap|
4918 lang/ menu translations |:menutrans|
4919 menu.vim GUI menus |menu.vim|
4920 plugin/ plugin scripts |write-plugin|
4921 print/ files for printing |postscript-print-encoding|
4922 syntax/ syntax files |mysyntaxfile|
4923 tutor/ files for vimtutor |tutor|
4924
4925 And any other file searched for with the |:runtime| command.
4926
4927 The defaults for most systems are setup to search five locations:
4928 1. In your home directory, for your personal preferences.
4929 2. In a system-wide Vim directory, for preferences from the system
4930 administrator.
4931 3. In $VIMRUNTIME, for files distributed with Vim.
4932 *after-directory*
4933 4. In the "after" directory in the system-wide Vim directory. This is
4934 for the system administrator to overrule or add to the distributed
4935 defaults (rarely needed)
4936 5. In the "after" directory in your home directory. This is for
4937 personal preferences to overrule or add to the distributed defaults
4938 or system-wide settings (rarely needed).
4939
4940 Note that, unlike 'path', no wildcards like "**" are allowed. Normal
4941 wildcards are allowed, but can significantly slow down searching for
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00004942 runtime files. For speed, use as few items as possible and avoid
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004943 wildcards.
4944 See |:runtime|.
4945 Example: >
4946 :set runtimepath=~/vimruntime,/mygroup/vim,$VIMRUNTIME
4947< This will use the directory "~/vimruntime" first (containing your
4948 personal Vim runtime files), then "/mygroup/vim" (shared between a
4949 group of people) and finally "$VIMRUNTIME" (the distributed runtime
4950 files).
4951 You probably should always include $VIMRUNTIME somewhere, to use the
4952 distributed runtime files. You can put a directory before $VIMRUNTIME
4953 to find files which replace a distributed runtime files. You can put
4954 a directory after $VIMRUNTIME to find files which add to distributed
4955 runtime files.
4956 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
4957 security reasons.
4958
4959 *'scroll'* *'scr'*
4960'scroll' 'scr' number (default: half the window height)
4961 local to window
4962 Number of lines to scroll with CTRL-U and CTRL-D commands. Will be
4963 set to half the number of lines in the window when the window size
4964 changes. If you give a count to the CTRL-U or CTRL-D command it will
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00004965 be used as the new value for 'scroll'. Reset to half the window
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004966 height with ":set scroll=0". {Vi is a bit different: 'scroll' gives
4967 the number of screen lines instead of file lines, makes a difference
4968 when lines wrap}
4969
4970 *'scrollbind'* *'scb'* *'noscrollbind'* *'noscb'*
4971'scrollbind' 'scb' boolean (default off)
4972 local to window
4973 {not in Vi}
4974 {not available when compiled without the |+scrollbind|
4975 feature}
4976 See also |scroll-binding|. When this option is set, the current
4977 window scrolls as other scrollbind windows (windows that also have
4978 this option set) scroll. This option is useful for viewing the
4979 differences between two versions of a file, see 'diff'.
4980 See |'scrollopt'| for options that determine how this option should be
4981 interpreted.
4982 This option is mostly reset when splitting a window to edit another
4983 file. This means that ":split | edit file" results in two windows
4984 with scroll-binding, but ":split file" does not.
4985
4986 *'scrolljump'* *'sj'*
4987'scrolljump' 'sj' number (default 1)
4988 global
4989 {not in Vi}
4990 Minimal number of lines to scroll when the cursor gets off the
4991 screen (e.g., with "j"). Not used for scroll commands (e.g., CTRL-E,
4992 CTRL-D). Useful if your terminal scrolls very slowly.
4993 NOTE: This option is set to 1 when 'compatible' is set.
4994
4995 *'scrolloff'* *'so'*
4996'scrolloff' 'so' number (default 0)
4997 global
4998 {not in Vi}
4999 Minimal number of screen lines to keep above and below the cursor.
5000 This will make some context visible around where you are working. If
5001 you set it to a very large value (999) the cursor line will always be
5002 in the middle of the window (except at the start or end of the file or
5003 when long lines wrap).
5004 For scrolling horizontally see 'sidescrolloff'.
5005 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set.
5006
5007 *'scrollopt'* *'sbo'*
5008'scrollopt' 'sbo' string (default "ver,jump")
5009 global
5010 {not available when compiled without the |+scrollbind|
5011 feature}
5012 {not in Vi}
5013 This is a comma-separated list of words that specifies how
5014 'scrollbind' windows should behave.
5015 The following words are available:
5016 ver Bind vertical scrolling for 'scrollbind' windows
5017 hor Bind horizontal scrolling for 'scrollbind' windows
5018 jump Applies to the offset between two windows for vertical
5019 scrolling. This offset is the difference in the first
5020 displayed line of the bound windows. When moving
5021 around in a window, another 'scrollbind' window may
5022 reach a position before the start or after the end of
5023 the buffer. The offset is not changed though, when
5024 moving back the 'scrollbind' window will try to scroll
5025 to the desired position when possible.
5026 When now making that window the current one, two
5027 things can be done with the relative offset:
5028 1. When "jump" is not included, the relative offset is
5029 adjusted for the scroll position in the new current
5030 window. When going back to the other window, the
5031 the new relative offset will be used.
5032 2. When "jump" is included, the other windows are
5033 scrolled to keep the same relative offset. When
5034 going back to the other window, it still uses the
5035 same relative offset.
5036 Also see |scroll-binding|.
5037
5038 *'sections'* *'sect'*
5039'sections' 'sect' string (default "SHNHH HUnhsh")
5040 global
5041 Specifies the nroff macros that separate sections. These are pairs of
5042 two letters (See |object-motions|). The default makes a section start
5043 at the nroff macros ".SH", ".NH", ".H", ".HU", ".nh" and ".sh".
5044
5045 *'secure'* *'nosecure'* *E523*
5046'secure' boolean (default off)
5047 global
5048 {not in Vi}
5049 When on, ":autocmd", shell and write commands are not allowed in
5050 ".vimrc" and ".exrc" in the current directory and map commands are
5051 displayed. Switch it off only if you know that you will not run into
5052 problems, or when the 'exrc' option is off. On Unix this option is
5053 only used if the ".vimrc" or ".exrc" is not owned by you. This can be
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005054 dangerous if the systems allows users to do a "chown". You better set
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005055 'secure' at the end of your ~/.vimrc then.
5056 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
5057 security reasons.
5058
5059 *'selection'* *'sel'*
5060'selection' 'sel' string (default "inclusive")
5061 global
5062 {not in Vi}
5063 This option defines the behavior of the selection. It is only used
5064 in Visual and Select mode.
5065 Possible values:
5066 value past line inclusive ~
5067 old no yes
5068 inclusive yes yes
5069 exclusive yes no
5070 "past line" means that the cursor is allowed to be positioned one
5071 character past the line.
5072 "inclusive" means that the last character of the selection is included
5073 in an operation. For example, when "x" is used to delete the
5074 selection.
5075 Note that when "exclusive" is used and selecting from the end
5076 backwards, you cannot include the last character of a line, when
5077 starting in Normal mode and 'virtualedit' empty.
5078
5079 The 'selection' option is set by the |:behave| command.
5080
5081 *'selectmode'* *'slm'*
5082'selectmode' 'slm' string (default "")
5083 global
5084 {not in Vi}
5085 This is a comma separated list of words, which specifies when to start
5086 Select mode instead of Visual mode, when a selection is started.
5087 Possible values:
5088 mouse when using the mouse
5089 key when using shifted special keys
5090 cmd when using "v", "V" or CTRL-V
5091 See |Select-mode|.
5092 The 'selectmode' option is set by the |:behave| command.
5093
5094 *'sessionoptions'* *'ssop'*
5095'sessionoptions' 'ssop' string (default: "blank,buffers,curdir,folds,
5096 help,options,winsize")
5097 global
5098 {not in Vi}
5099 {not available when compiled without the +mksession
5100 feature}
5101 Changes the effect of the |:mksession| command. It is a comma
5102 separated list of words. Each word enables saving and restoring
5103 something:
5104 word save and restore ~
5105 blank empty windows
5106 buffers hidden and unloaded buffers, not just those in windows
5107 curdir the current directory
5108 folds manually created folds, opened/closed folds and local
5109 fold options
5110 globals global variables that start with an uppercase letter
Bram Moolenaar12805862005-01-05 22:16:17 +00005111 and contain at least one lowercase letter. Only
5112 String and Number types are stored.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005113 help the help window
5114 localoptions options and mappings local to a window or buffer (not
5115 global values for local options)
5116 options all options and mappings (also global values for local
5117 options)
5118 resize size of the Vim window: 'lines' and 'columns'
5119 sesdir the directory in which the session file is located
5120 will become the current directory (useful with
5121 projects accessed over a network from different
5122 systems)
5123 slash backslashes in file names replaced with forward
5124 slashes
5125 unix with Unix end-of-line format (single <NL>), even when
5126 on Windows or DOS
5127 winpos position of the whole Vim window
5128 winsize window sizes
5129
5130 Don't include both "curdir" and "sesdir".
5131 When "curdir" nor "sesdir" is included, file names are stored with
5132 absolute paths.
5133 "slash" and "unix" are useful on Windows when sharing session files
5134 with Unix. The Unix version of Vim cannot source dos format scripts,
5135 but the Windows version of Vim can source unix format scripts.
5136
5137 *'shell'* *'sh'* *E91*
5138'shell' 'sh' string (default $SHELL or "sh",
5139 MS-DOS and Win32: "command.com" or
5140 "cmd.exe", OS/2: "cmd")
5141 global
5142 Name of the shell to use for ! and :! commands. When changing the
5143 value also check these options: 'shelltype', 'shellpipe', 'shellslash'
5144 'shellredir', 'shellquote', 'shellxquote' and 'shellcmdflag'.
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005145 It is allowed to give an argument to the command, e.g. "csh -f".
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005146 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
5147 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
5148 If the name of the shell contains a space, you might need to enclose
5149 it in quotes. Example: >
5150 :set shell=\"c:\program\ files\unix\sh.exe\"\ -f
5151< Note the backslash before each quote (to avoid starting a comment) and
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005152 each space (to avoid ending the option value). Also note that the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005153 "-f" is not inside the quotes, because it is not part of the command
5154 name. And Vim automagically recognizes the backslashes that are path
5155 separators.
5156 For Dos 32 bits (DJGPP), you can set the $DJSYSFLAGS environment
5157 variable to change the way external commands are executed. See the
5158 libc.inf file of DJGPP.
5159 Under MS-Windows, when the executable ends in ".com" it must be
5160 included. Thus setting the shell to "command.com" or "4dos.com"
5161 works, but "command" and "4dos" do not work for all commands (e.g.,
5162 filtering).
5163 For unknown reasons, when using "4dos.com" the current directory is
5164 changed to "C:\". To avoid this set 'shell' like this: >
5165 :set shell=command.com\ /c\ 4dos
5166< This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
5167 security reasons.
5168
5169 *'shellcmdflag'* *'shcf'*
5170'shellcmdflag' 'shcf' string (default: "-c", MS-DOS and Win32, when 'shell'
5171 does not contain "sh" somewhere: "/c")
5172 global
5173 {not in Vi}
5174 Flag passed to the shell to execute "!" and ":!" commands; e.g.,
5175 "bash.exe -c ls" or "command.com /c dir". For the MS-DOS-like
5176 systems, the default is set according to the value of 'shell', to
5177 reduce the need to set this option by the user. It's not used for
5178 OS/2 (EMX figures this out itself). See |option-backslash| about
5179 including spaces and backslashes. See |dos-shell|.
5180 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
5181 security reasons.
5182
5183 *'shellpipe'* *'sp'*
5184'shellpipe' 'sp' string (default ">", "| tee", "|& tee" or "2>&1| tee")
5185 global
5186 {not in Vi}
5187 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
5188 feature}
5189 String to be used to put the output of the ":make" command in the
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005190 error file. See also |:make_makeprg|. See |option-backslash| about
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005191 including spaces and backslashes.
5192 The name of the temporary file can be represented by "%s" if necessary
5193 (the file name is appended automatically if no %s appears in the value
5194 of this option).
5195 For the Amiga and MS-DOS the default is ">". The output is directly
5196 saved in a file and not echoed to the screen.
5197 For Unix the default it "| tee". The stdout of the compiler is saved
5198 in a file and echoed to the screen. If the 'shell' option is "csh" or
5199 "tcsh" after initializations, the default becomes "|& tee". If the
5200 'shell' option is "sh", "ksh", "zsh" or "bash" the default becomes
5201 "2>&1| tee". This means that stderr is also included.
5202 The initialization of this option is done after reading the ".vimrc"
5203 and the other initializations, so that when the 'shell' option is set
5204 there, the 'shellpipe' option changes automatically, unless it was
5205 explicitly set before.
5206 When 'shellpipe' is set to an empty string, no redirection of the
5207 ":make" output will be done. This is useful if you use a 'makeprg'
5208 that writes to 'makeef' by itself. If you want no piping, but do
5209 want to include the 'makeef', set 'shellpipe' to a single space.
5210 Don't forget to precede the space with a backslash: ":set sp=\ ".
5211 In the future pipes may be used for filtering and this option will
5212 become obsolete (at least for Unix).
5213 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
5214 security reasons.
5215
5216 *'shellquote'* *'shq'*
5217'shellquote' 'shq' string (default: ""; MS-DOS and Win32, when 'shell'
5218 contains "sh" somewhere: "\"")
5219 global
5220 {not in Vi}
5221 Quoting character(s), put around the command passed to the shell, for
5222 the "!" and ":!" commands. The redirection is kept outside of the
5223 quoting. See 'shellxquote' to include the redirection. It's
5224 probably not useful to set both options.
5225 This is an empty string by default. Only known to be useful for
5226 third-party shells on MS-DOS-like systems, such as the MKS Korn Shell
5227 or bash, where it should be "\"". The default is adjusted according
5228 the value of 'shell', to reduce the need to set this option by the
5229 user. See |dos-shell|.
5230 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
5231 security reasons.
5232
5233 *'shellredir'* *'srr'*
5234'shellredir' 'srr' string (default ">", ">&" or ">%s 2>&1")
5235 global
5236 {not in Vi}
5237 String to be used to put the output of a filter command in a temporary
5238 file. See also |:!|. See |option-backslash| about including spaces
5239 and backslashes.
5240 The name of the temporary file can be represented by "%s" if necessary
5241 (the file name is appended automatically if no %s appears in the value
5242 of this option).
5243 The default is ">". For Unix, if the 'shell' option is "csh", "tcsh"
5244 or "zsh" during initializations, the default becomes ">&". If the
5245 'shell' option is "sh", "ksh" or "bash" the default becomes
5246 ">%s 2>&1". This means that stderr is also included.
5247 For Win32, the Unix checks are done and additionally "cmd" is checked
5248 for, which makes the default ">%s 2>&1". Also, the same names with
5249 ".exe" appended are checked for.
5250 The initialization of this option is done after reading the ".vimrc"
5251 and the other initializations, so that when the 'shell' option is set
5252 there, the 'shellredir' option changes automatically unless it was
5253 explicitly set before.
5254 In the future pipes may be used for filtering and this option will
5255 become obsolete (at least for Unix).
5256 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
5257 security reasons.
5258
5259 *'shellslash'* *'ssl'* *'noshellslash'* *'nossl'*
5260'shellslash' 'ssl' boolean (default off)
5261 global
5262 {not in Vi} {only for MSDOS, MS-Windows and OS/2}
5263 When set, a forward slash is used when expanding file names. This is
5264 useful when a Unix-like shell is used instead of command.com or
5265 cmd.exe. Backward slashes can still be typed, but they are changed to
5266 forward slashes by Vim.
5267 Note that setting or resetting this option has no effect for some
5268 existing file names, thus this option needs to be set before opening
5269 any file for best results. This might change in the future.
5270 'shellslash' only works when a backslash can be used as a path
5271 separator. To test if this is so use: >
5272 if exists('+shellslash')
5273<
Bram Moolenaar26a60b42005-02-22 08:49:11 +00005274 *'shelltemp'* *'stmp'* *'noshelltemp'* *'nostmp'*
5275'shelltemp' 'stmp' boolean (Vi default off, Vim default on)
5276 global
5277 {not in Vi}
5278 When on, use temp files for shell commands. When off use a pipe.
5279 When using a pipe is not possible temp files are used anyway.
5280 Currently a pipe is only supported on Unix. You can check it with: >
5281 :if has("filterpipe")
5282< The advantage of using a pipe is that nobody can read the temp file
5283 and the 'shell' command does not need to support redirection.
5284 The advantage of using a temp file is that the file type and encoding
5285 can be detected.
5286 The |FilterReadPre|, |FilterReadPost| and |FilterWritePre|,
5287 |FilterWritePost| autocommands event are not triggered when
5288 'shelltemp' is off.
5289
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005290 *'shelltype'* *'st'*
5291'shelltype' 'st' number (default 0)
5292 global
5293 {not in Vi} {only for the Amiga}
5294 On the Amiga this option influences the way how the commands work
5295 which use a shell.
5296 0 and 1: always use the shell
5297 2 and 3: use the shell only to filter lines
5298 4 and 5: use shell only for ':sh' command
5299 When not using the shell, the command is executed directly.
5300
5301 0 and 2: use "shell 'shellcmdflag' cmd" to start external commands
5302 1 and 3: use "shell cmd" to start external commands
5303
5304 *'shellxquote'* *'sxq'*
5305'shellxquote' 'sxq' string (default: "";
5306 for Win32, when 'shell' contains "sh"
5307 somewhere: "\""
5308 for Unix, when using system(): "\"")
5309 global
5310 {not in Vi}
5311 Quoting character(s), put around the command passed to the shell, for
5312 the "!" and ":!" commands. Includes the redirection. See
5313 'shellquote' to exclude the redirection. It's probably not useful
5314 to set both options.
5315 This is an empty string by default. Known to be useful for
5316 third-party shells when using the Win32 version, such as the MKS Korn
5317 Shell or bash, where it should be "\"". The default is adjusted
5318 according the value of 'shell', to reduce the need to set this option
5319 by the user. See |dos-shell|.
5320 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
5321 security reasons.
5322
5323 *'shiftround'* *'sr'* *'noshiftround'* *'nosr'*
5324'shiftround' 'sr' boolean (default off)
5325 global
5326 {not in Vi}
5327 Round indent to multiple of 'shiftwidth'. Applies to > and <
5328 commands. CTRL-T and CTRL-D in Insert mode always round the indent to
5329 a multiple of 'shiftwidth' (this is Vi compatible).
5330 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
5331
5332 *'shiftwidth'* *'sw'*
5333'shiftwidth' 'sw' number (default 8)
5334 local to buffer
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005335 Number of spaces to use for each step of (auto)indent. Used for
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005336 |'cindent'|, |>>|, |<<|, etc.
5337
5338 *'shortmess'* *'shm'*
Bram Moolenaar26a60b42005-02-22 08:49:11 +00005339'shortmess' 'shm' string (Vim default "filnxtToO", Vi default: "",
5340 POSIX default: "A")
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005341 global
5342 {not in Vi}
5343 This option helps to avoid all the |hit-enter| prompts caused by file
5344 messages, for example with CTRL-G, and to avoid some other messages.
5345 It is a list of flags:
5346 flag meaning when present ~
5347 f use "(3 of 5)" instead of "(file 3 of 5)"
5348 i use "[noeol]" instead of "[Incomplete last line]"
5349 l use "999L, 888C" instead of "999 lines, 888 characters"
5350 m use "[+]" instead of "[Modified]"
5351 n use "[New]" instead of "[New File]"
5352 r use "[RO]" instead of "[readonly]"
5353 w use "[w]" instead of "written" for file write message
5354 and "[a]" instead of "appended" for ':w >> file' command
5355 x use "[dos]" instead of "[dos format]", "[unix]" instead of
5356 "[unix format]" and "[mac]" instead of "[mac format]".
5357 a all of the above abbreviations
5358
5359 o overwrite message for writing a file with subsequent message
5360 for reading a file (useful for ":wn" or when 'autowrite' on)
5361 O message for reading a file overwrites any previous message.
5362 Also for quickfix message (e.g., ":cn").
5363 s don't give "search hit BOTTOM, continuing at TOP" or "search
5364 hit TOP, continuing at BOTTOM" messages
5365 t truncate file message at the start if it is too long to fit
5366 on the command-line, "<" will appear in the left most column.
5367 Ignored in Ex mode.
5368 T truncate other messages in the middle if they are too long to
5369 fit on the command line. "..." will appear in the middle.
5370 Ignored in Ex mode.
5371 W don't give "written" or "[w]" when writing a file
5372 A don't give the "ATTENTION" message when an existing swap file
5373 is found.
5374 I don't give the intro message when starting Vim |:intro|.
5375
5376 This gives you the opportunity to avoid that a change between buffers
5377 requires you to hit <Enter>, but still gives as useful a message as
5378 possible for the space available. To get the whole message that you
5379 would have got with 'shm' empty, use ":file!"
5380 Useful values:
5381 shm= No abbreviation of message.
5382 shm=a Abbreviation, but no loss of information.
5383 shm=at Abbreviation, and truncate message when necessary.
5384
5385 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
5386 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
5387
5388 *'shortname'* *'sn'* *'noshortname'* *'nosn'*
5389'shortname' 'sn' boolean (default off)
5390 local to buffer
5391 {not in Vi, not in MS-DOS versions}
5392 Filenames are assumed to be 8 characters plus one extension of 3
5393 characters. Multiple dots in file names are not allowed. When this
5394 option is on, dots in file names are replaced with underscores when
5395 adding an extension (".~" or ".swp"). This option is not available
5396 for MS-DOS, because then it would always be on. This option is useful
5397 when editing files on an MS-DOS compatible filesystem, e.g., messydos
5398 or crossdos. When running the Win32 GUI version under Win32s, this
5399 option is always on by default.
5400
5401 *'showbreak'* *'sbr'* *E595*
5402'showbreak' 'sbr' string (default "")
5403 global
5404 {not in Vi}
5405 {not available when compiled without the |+linebreak|
5406 feature}
5407 String to put at the start of lines that have been wrapped. Useful
5408 values are "> " or "+++ ".
5409 Only printable single-cell characters are allowed, excluding <Tab> and
5410 comma (in a future version the comma might be used to separate the
5411 part that is shown at the end and at the start of a line).
5412 The characters are highlighted according to the '@' flag in
5413 'highlight'.
5414 Note that tabs after the showbreak will be displayed differently.
5415 If you want the 'showbreak' to appear in between line numbers, add the
5416 "n" flag to 'cpoptions'.
5417
5418 *'showcmd'* *'sc'* *'noshowcmd'* *'nosc'*
5419'showcmd' 'sc' boolean (Vim default: on, off for Unix, Vi default:
5420 off)
5421 global
5422 {not in Vi}
5423 {not available when compiled without the
5424 |+cmdline_info| feature}
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005425 Show (partial) command in status line. Set this option off if your
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005426 terminal is slow.
5427 In Visual mode the size of the selected area is shown:
5428 - When selecting characters within a line, the number of characters.
5429 - When selecting more than one line, the number of lines.
5430 - When selecting a block, the size in screen characters: linesxcolumns.
5431 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
5432 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
5433
5434 *'showfulltag'* *'sft'* *'noshowfulltag'* *'nosft'*
5435'showfulltag' 'sft' boolean (default off)
5436 global
5437 {not in Vi}
5438 When completing a word in insert mode (see |ins-completion|) from the
5439 tags file, show both the tag name and a tidied-up form of the search
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005440 pattern (if there is one) as possible matches. Thus, if you have
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005441 matched a C function, you can see a template for what arguments are
5442 required (coding style permitting).
5443
5444 *'showmatch'* *'sm'* *'noshowmatch'* *'nosm'*
5445'showmatch' 'sm' boolean (default off)
5446 global
5447 When a bracket is inserted, briefly jump to the matching one. The
5448 jump is only done if the match can be seen on the screen. The time to
5449 show the match can be set with 'matchtime'.
5450 A Beep is given if there is no match (no matter if the match can be
5451 seen or not). This option is reset when the 'paste' option is set.
5452 When the 'm' flag is not included in 'cpoptions', typing a character
5453 will immediately move the cursor back to where it belongs.
5454 See the "sm" field in 'guicursor' for setting the cursor shape and
5455 blinking when showing the match.
5456 The 'matchpairs' option can be used to specify the characters to show
5457 matches for. 'rightleft' and 'revins' are used to look for opposite
5458 matches.
5459 Note: For the use of the short form parental guidance is advised.
5460
5461 *'showmode'* *'smd'* *'noshowmode'* *'nosmd'*
5462'showmode' 'smd' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
5463 global
5464 If in Insert, Replace or Visual mode put a message on the last line.
5465 Use the 'M' flag in 'highlight' to set the type of highlighting for
5466 this message.
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005467 When |XIM| may be used the message will include "XIM". But this
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005468 doesn't mean XIM is really active, especially when 'imactivatekey' is
5469 not set.
5470 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
5471 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
5472
5473 *'sidescroll'* *'ss'*
5474'sidescroll' 'ss' number (default 0)
5475 global
5476 {not in Vi}
5477 The minimal number of columns to scroll horizontally. Used only when
5478 the 'wrap' option is off and the cursor is moved off of the screen.
5479 When it is zero the cursor will be put in the middle of the screen.
5480 When using a slow terminal set it to a large number or 0. When using
5481 a fast terminal use a small number or 1. Not used for "zh" and "zl"
5482 commands.
5483
5484 *'sidescrolloff'* *'siso'*
5485'sidescrolloff' 'siso' number (default 0)
5486 global
5487 {not in Vi}
5488 The minimal number of screen columns to keep to the left and to the
5489 right of the cursor if 'nowrap' is set. Setting this option to a value
5490 greater than 0 while having |'sidescroll'| also at a non-zero value
5491 makes some context visible in the line you are scrolling in
5492 horizontally (except at the end and beginning of the line). Setting
5493 this option to a large value (like 999) has the effect of keeping the
5494 cursor horizontally centered in the window, as long as one does not
5495 come too close to the beginning or end of the line.
5496 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set.
5497
5498 Example: Try this together with 'sidescroll' and 'listchars' as
5499 in the following example to never allow the cursor to move
5500 onto the "extends" character:
5501
5502 :set nowrap sidescroll=1 listchars=extends:>,precedes:<
5503 :set sidescrolloff=1
5504
5505
5506 *'smartcase'* *'scs'* *'nosmartcase'* *'noscs'*
5507'smartcase' 'scs' boolean (default off)
5508 global
5509 {not in Vi}
5510 Override the 'ignorecase' option if the search pattern contains upper
5511 case characters. Only used when the search pattern is typed and
5512 'ignorecase' option is on. Used for the commands "/", "?", "n", "N",
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005513 ":g" and ":s". Not used for "*", "#", "gd", tag search, etc.. After
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005514 "*" and "#" you can make 'smartcase' used by doing a "/" command,
5515 recalling the search pattern from history and hitting <Enter>.
5516 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
5517
5518 *'smartindent'* *'si'* *'nosmartindent'* *'nosi'*
5519'smartindent' 'si' boolean (default off)
5520 local to buffer
5521 {not in Vi}
5522 {not available when compiled without the
5523 |+smartindent| feature}
5524 Do smart autoindenting when starting a new line. Works for C-like
5525 programs, but can also be used for other languages. 'cindent' does
5526 something like this, works better in most cases, but is more strict,
5527 see |C-indenting|. When 'cindent' is on, setting 'si' has no effect.
5528 'indentexpr' is a more advanced alternative.
5529 Normally 'autoindent' should also be on when using 'smartindent'.
5530 An indent is automatically inserted:
5531 - After a line ending in '{'.
5532 - After a line starting with a keyword from 'cinwords'.
5533 - Before a line starting with '}' (only with the "O" command).
5534 When typing '}' as the first character in a new line, that line is
5535 given the same indent as the matching '{'.
5536 When typing '#' as the first character in a new line, the indent for
5537 that line is removed, the '#' is put in the first column. The indent
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005538 is restored for the next line. If you don't want this, use this
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005539 mapping: ":inoremap # X^H#", where ^H is entered with CTRL-V CTRL-H.
5540 When using the ">>" command, lines starting with '#' are not shifted
5541 right.
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005542 NOTE: 'smartindent' is reset when 'compatible' is set. When 'paste'
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005543 is set smart indenting is disabled.
5544
5545 *'smarttab'* *'sta'* *'nosmarttab'* *'nosta'*
5546'smarttab' 'sta' boolean (default off)
5547 global
5548 {not in Vi}
5549 When on, a <Tab> in front of a line inserts blanks according to
5550 'shiftwidth'. 'tabstop' is used in other places. A <BS> will delete
5551 a 'shiftwidth' worth of space at the start of the line.
5552 When off a <Tab> always inserts blanks according to 'tabstop'.
5553 'shiftwidth' is only used for shifting text left or right
5554 |shift-left-right|.
5555 What gets inserted (a Tab or spaces) depends on the 'expandtab'
5556 option. Also see |ins-expandtab|. When 'expandtab' is not set, the
Bram Moolenaar843ee412004-06-30 16:16:41 +00005557 number of spaces is minimized by using <Tab>s.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005558 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
5559
5560 *'softtabstop'* *'sts'*
5561'softtabstop' 'sts' number (default 0)
5562 local to buffer
5563 {not in Vi}
5564 Number of spaces that a <Tab> counts for while performing editing
5565 operations, like inserting a <Tab> or using <BS>. It "feels" like
5566 <Tab>s are being inserted, while in fact a mix of spaces and <Tab>s is
5567 used. This is useful to keep the 'ts' setting at its standard value
5568 of 8, while being able to edit like it is set to 'sts'. However,
5569 commands like "x" still work on the actual characters.
5570 When 'sts' is zero, this feature is off.
5571 'softtabstop' is set to 0 when the 'paste' option is set.
5572 See also |ins-expandtab|. When 'expandtab' is not set, the number of
5573 spaces is minimized by using <Tab>s.
5574 The 'L' flag in 'cpoptions' changes how tabs are used when 'list' is
5575 set.
5576 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set.
5577
5578 *'splitbelow'* *'sb'* *'nosplitbelow'* *'nosb'*
5579'splitbelow' 'sb' boolean (default off)
5580 global
5581 {not in Vi}
5582 {not available when compiled without the +windows
5583 feature}
5584 When on, splitting a window will put the new window below the current
5585 one. |:split|
5586
5587 *'splitright'* *'spr'* *'nosplitright'* *'nospr'*
5588'splitright' 'spr' boolean (default off)
5589 global
5590 {not in Vi}
5591 {not available when compiled without the +vertsplit
5592 feature}
5593 When on, splitting a window will put the new window right of the
5594 current one. |:vsplit|
5595
5596 *'startofline'* *'sol'* *'nostartofline'* *'nosol'*
5597'startofline' 'sol' boolean (default on)
5598 global
5599 {not in Vi}
5600 When "on" the commands listed below move the cursor to the first
Bram Moolenaar843ee412004-06-30 16:16:41 +00005601 non-blank of the line. When off the cursor is kept in the same column
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005602 (if possible). This applies to the commands: CTRL-D, CTRL-U, CTRL-B,
Bram Moolenaar843ee412004-06-30 16:16:41 +00005603 CTRL-F, "G", "H", "M", "L", gg, and to the commands "d", "<<" and ">>"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005604 with a linewise operator, with "%" with a count and to buffer changing
5605 commands (CTRL-^, :bnext, :bNext, etc.). Also for an Ex command that
5606 only has a line number, e.g., ":25" or ":+".
5607 In case of buffer changing commands the cursor is placed at the column
5608 where it was the last time the buffer was edited.
5609 NOTE: This option is set when 'compatible' is set.
5610
5611 *'statusline'* *'stl'* *E540* *E541* *E542*
5612'statusline' 'stl' string (default empty)
Bram Moolenaarb5bf5b82004-12-24 14:35:23 +00005613 global or local to window |global-local|
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005614 {not in Vi}
5615 {not available when compiled without the |+statusline|
5616 feature}
5617 When nonempty, this option determines the content of the status line.
5618 Also see |status-line|.
5619
5620 The option consists of printf style '%' items interspersed with
5621 normal text. Each status line item is of the form:
5622 %-0{minwid}.{maxwid}{item}
5623 All fields except the {item} is optional. A single percent sign can
5624 be given as "%%". Up to 80 items can be specified.
5625
5626 Note that the only effect of 'ruler' when this option is set (and
5627 'laststatus' is 2) is controlling the output of |CTRL-G|.
5628
5629 field meaning ~
5630 - Left justify the item. The default is right justified
5631 when minwid is larger than the length of the item.
5632 0 Leading zeroes in numeric items. Overridden by '-'.
5633 minwid Minimum width of the item, padding as set by '-' & '0'.
5634 Value must be 50 or less.
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005635 maxwid Maximum width of the item. Truncation occurs with a '<'
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005636 on the left for text items. Numeric items will be
5637 shifted down to maxwid-2 digits followed by '>'number
5638 where number is the amount of missing digits, much like
5639 an exponential notation.
5640 item A one letter code as described below.
5641
5642 Following is a description of the possible statusline items. The
5643 second character in "item" is the type:
5644 N for number
5645 S for string
5646 F for flags as described below
5647 - not applicable
5648
5649 item meaning ~
5650 f S Path to the file in the buffer, relative to current directory.
5651 F S Full path to the file in the buffer.
5652 t S File name (tail) of file in the buffer.
5653 m F Modified flag, text is " [+]"; " [-]" if 'modifiable' is off.
5654 M F Modified flag, text is ",+" or ",-".
5655 r F Readonly flag, text is " [RO]".
5656 R F Readonly flag, text is ",RO".
5657 h F Help buffer flag, text is " [help]".
5658 H F Help buffer flag, text is ",HLP".
5659 w F Preview window flag, text is " [Preview]".
5660 W F Preview window flag, text is ",PRV".
5661 y F Type of file in the buffer, e.g., " [vim]". See 'filetype'.
5662 Y F Type of file in the buffer, e.g., ",VIM". See 'filetype'.
5663 {not available when compiled without |+autocmd| feature}
5664 k S Value of "b:keymap_name" or 'keymap' when |:lmap| mappings are
5665 being used: "<keymap>"
5666 n N Buffer number.
5667 b N Value of byte under cursor.
5668 B N As above, in hexadecimal.
5669 o N Byte number in file of byte under cursor, first byte is 1.
5670 Mnemonic: Offset from start of file (with one added)
5671 {not available when compiled without |+byte_offset| feature}
5672 O N As above, in hexadecimal.
5673 N N Printer page number. (Only works in the 'printheader' option.)
5674 l N Line number.
5675 L N Number of lines in buffer.
5676 c N Column number.
5677 v N Virtual column number.
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005678 V N Virtual column number as -{num}. Not displayed if equal to 'c'.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005679 p N Percentage through file in lines as in |CTRL-G|.
5680 P S Percentage through file of displayed window. This is like the
5681 percentage described for 'ruler'. Always 3 in length.
5682 a S Argument list status as in default title. ({current} of {max})
5683 Empty if the argument file count is zero or one.
5684 { NF Evaluate expression between '{' and '}' and substitute result.
5685 ( - Start of item group. Can be used for setting the width and
5686 alignment of a section. Must be followed by %) somewhere.
5687 ) - End of item group. No width fields allowed.
5688 < - Where to truncate line if too long. Default is at the start.
5689 No width fields allowed.
5690 = - Separation point between left and right aligned items.
5691 No width fields allowed.
5692 * - Set highlight group to User{N}, where {N} is taken from the
5693 minwid field. eg. %1*. Restore normal highlight with %* or %0*.
5694 The difference between User{N} and StatusLine will be applied
5695 to StatusLineNC for the statusline of non-current windows.
5696 The number N must be between 1 and 9. See |hl-User1..9|
5697
5698 Display of flags are controlled by the following heuristic:
5699 If a flag text starts with comma it is assumed that it wants to
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005700 separate itself from anything but preceding plaintext. If it starts
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005701 with a space it is assumed that it wants to separate itself from
5702 anything but other flags. That is: A leading comma is removed if the
5703 preceding character stems from plaintext. A leading space is removed
5704 if the preceding character stems from another active flag. This will
5705 make a nice display when flags are used like in the examples below.
5706
5707 When all items in a group becomes an empty string (ie. flags that are
5708 not set) and a minwid is not set for the group, the whole group will
5709 become empty. This will make a group like the following disappear
5710 completely from the statusline when none of the flags are set. >
5711 :set statusline=...%(\ [%M%R%H]%)...
5712<
5713 Beware that an expression is evaluated each and every time the status
5714 line is displayed. The current buffer and current window will be set
5715 temporarily to that of the window (and buffer) whose statusline is
5716 currently being drawn. The expression will evaluate in this context.
5717 The variable "actual_curbuf" is set to the 'bufnr()' number of the
5718 real current buffer. The expression is evaluated in the |sandbox|.
5719
5720 If the statusline is not updated when you want it (e.g., after setting
5721 a variable that's used in an expression), you can force an update by
5722 setting an option without changing its value. Example: >
5723 :let &ro = &ro
5724
5725< A result of all digits is regarded a number for display purposes.
5726 Otherwise the result is taken as flag text and applied to the rules
5727 described above.
5728
5729 Watch out for errors in expressions. They may render Vim unusable !
5730 If you are stuck, hold down ':' or 'Q' to get a prompt, then quit and
5731 edit your .vimrc or whatever with "vim -u NONE" to get it right.
5732
5733 Examples:
5734 Emulate standard status line with 'ruler' set >
5735 :set statusline=%<%f\ %h%m%r%=%-14.(%l,%c%V%)\ %P
5736< Similar, but add ASCII value of char under the cursor (like "ga") >
5737 :set statusline=%<%f%h%m%r%=%b\ 0x%B\ \ %l,%c%V\ %P
5738< Display byte count and byte value, modified flag in red. >
5739 :set statusline=%<%f%=\ [%1*%M%*%n%R%H]\ %-19(%3l,%02c%03V%)%O'%02b'
5740 :hi User1 term=inverse,bold cterm=inverse,bold ctermfg=red
5741< Display a ,GZ flag if a compressed file is loaded >
5742 :set statusline=...%r%{VarExists('b:gzflag','\ [GZ]')}%h...
5743< In the |:autocmd|'s: >
5744 :let b:gzflag = 1
5745< And: >
5746 :unlet b:gzflag
5747< And define this function: >
5748 :function VarExists(var, val)
5749 : if exists(a:var) | return a:val | else | return '' | endif
5750 :endfunction
5751<
5752 *'suffixes'* *'su'*
5753'suffixes' 'su' string (default ".bak,~,.o,.h,.info,.swp,.obj")
5754 global
5755 {not in Vi}
5756 Files with these suffixes get a lower priority when multiple files
5757 match a wildcard. See |suffixes|. Commas can be used to separate the
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005758 suffixes. Spaces after the comma are ignored. A dot is also seen as
5759 the start of a suffix. To avoid a dot or comma being recognized as a
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005760 separator, precede it with a backslash (see |option-backslash| about
5761 including spaces and backslashes).
5762 See 'wildignore' for completely ignoring files.
5763 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
5764 suffixes from the list. This avoids problems when a future version
5765 uses another default.
5766
5767 *'suffixesadd'* *'sua'*
5768'suffixesadd' 'sua' string (default "")
5769 local to buffer
5770 {not in Vi}
5771 {not available when compiled without the
5772 |+file_in_path| feature}
5773 Comma separated list of suffixes, which are used when searching for a
5774 file for the "gf", "[I", etc. commands. Example: >
5775 :set suffixesadd=.java
5776<
5777 *'swapfile'* *'swf'* *'noswapfile'* *'noswf'*
5778'swapfile' 'swf' boolean (default on)
5779 local to buffer
5780 {not in Vi}
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005781 Use a swapfile for the buffer. This option can be reset when a
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005782 swapfile is not wanted for a specific buffer. For example, with
5783 confidential information that even root must not be able to access.
5784 Careful: All text will be in memory:
5785 - Don't use this for big files.
5786 - Recovery will be impossible!
5787 A swapfile will only be present when |'updatecount'| is non-zero and
5788 'swapfile' is set.
5789 When 'swapfile' is reset, the swap file for the current buffer is
5790 immediately deleted. When 'swapfile' is set, and 'updatecount' is
5791 non-zero, a swap file is immediately created.
5792 Also see |swap-file| and |'swapsync'|.
5793
5794 This option is used together with 'bufhidden' and 'buftype' to
5795 specify special kinds of buffers. See |special-buffers|.
5796
5797 *'swapsync'* *'sws'*
5798'swapsync' 'sws' string (default "fsync")
5799 global
5800 {not in Vi}
5801 When this option is not empty a swap file is synced to disk after
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005802 writing to it. This takes some time, especially on busy unix systems.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005803 When this option is empty parts of the swap file may be in memory and
5804 not written to disk. When the system crashes you may lose more work.
5805 On Unix the system does a sync now and then without Vim asking for it,
5806 so the disadvantage of setting this option off is small. On some
5807 systems the swap file will not be written at all. For a unix system
5808 setting it to "sync" will use the sync() call instead of the default
5809 fsync(), which may work better on some systems.
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +00005810 The 'fsync' option is used for the actual file.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005811
5812 *'switchbuf'* *'swb'*
5813'switchbuf' 'swb' string (default "")
5814 global
5815 {not in Vi}
5816 This option controls the behavior when switching between buffers.
5817 Possible values (comma separated list):
5818 useopen If included, jump to the first open window that
5819 contains the specified buffer (if there is one).
5820 Otherwise: Do not examine other windows.
5821 This setting is checked with |quickfix| commands, when
5822 jumping to errors (":cc", ":cn", "cp", etc.). It is
5823 also used in all buffer related split commands, for
5824 example ":sbuffer", ":sbnext", or ":sbrewind".
5825 split If included, split the current window before loading
5826 a buffer. Otherwise: do not split, use current window.
5827 Supported in |quickfix| commands that display errors.
5828
5829 *'syntax'* *'syn'*
5830'syntax' 'syn' string (default empty)
5831 local to buffer
5832 {not in Vi}
5833 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax|
5834 feature}
5835 When this option is set, the syntax with this name is loaded, unless
5836 syntax highlighting has been switched off with ":syntax off".
5837 Otherwise this option does not always reflect the current syntax (the
5838 b:current_syntax variable does).
5839 This option is most useful in a modeline, for a file which syntax is
5840 not automatically recognized. Example, for in an IDL file: >
5841 /* vim: set syntax=idl : */
5842< To switch off syntax highlighting for the current file, use: >
5843 :set syntax=OFF
5844< To switch syntax highlighting on according to the current value of the
5845 'filetype' option: >
5846 :set syntax=ON
5847< What actually happens when setting the 'syntax' option is that the
5848 Syntax autocommand event is triggered with the value as argument.
5849 This option is not copied to another buffer, independent of the 's' or
5850 'S' flag in 'cpoptions'.
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +00005851 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005852
5853 *'tabstop'* *'ts'*
5854'tabstop' 'ts' number (default 8)
5855 local to buffer
5856 Number of spaces that a <Tab> in the file counts for. Also see
5857 |:retab| command, and 'softtabstop' option.
5858
5859 Note: Setting 'tabstop' to any other value than 8 can make your file
5860 appear wrong in many places (e.g., when printing it).
5861
5862 There are four main ways to use tabs in Vim:
5863 1. Always keep 'tabstop' at 8, set 'softtabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to 4
5864 (or 3 or whatever you prefer) and use 'noexpandtab'. Then Vim
5865 will use a mix of tabs and spaces, but typing Tab and BS will
5866 behave like a tab appears every 4 (or 3) characters.
5867 2. Set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to whatever you prefer and use
5868 'expandtab'. This way you will always insert spaces. The
5869 formatting will never be messed up when 'tabstop' is changed.
5870 3. Set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to whatever you prefer and use a
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005871 |modeline| to set these values when editing the file again. Only
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005872 works when using Vim to edit the file.
5873 4. Always set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to the same value, and
5874 'noexpandtab'. This should then work (for initial indents only)
5875 for any tabstop setting that people use. It might be nice to have
5876 tabs after the first non-blank inserted as spaces if you do this
5877 though. Otherwise aligned comments will be wrong when 'tabstop' is
5878 changed.
5879
5880 *'tagbsearch'* *'tbs'* *'notagbsearch'* *'notbs'*
5881'tagbsearch' 'tbs' boolean (default on)
5882 global
5883 {not in Vi}
5884 When searching for a tag (e.g., for the |:ta| command), Vim can either
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005885 use a binary search or a linear search in a tags file. Binary
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005886 searching makes searching for a tag a LOT faster, but a linear search
5887 will find more tags if the tags file wasn't properly sorted.
5888 Vim normally assumes that your tags files are sorted, or indicate that
5889 they are not sorted. Only when this is not the case does the
5890 'tagbsearch' option need to be switched off.
5891
5892 When 'tagbsearch' is on, binary searching is first used in the tags
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005893 files. In certain situations, Vim will do a linear search instead for
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005894 certain files, or retry all files with a linear search. When
5895 'tagbsearch' is off, only a linear search is done.
5896
5897 Linear searching is done anyway, for one file, when Vim finds a line
5898 at the start of the file indicating that it's not sorted: >
5899 !_TAG_FILE_SORTED 0 /some command/
5900< [The whitespace before and after the '0' must be a single <Tab>]
5901
5902 When a binary search was done and no match was found in any of the
5903 files listed in 'tags', and 'ignorecase' is set or a pattern is used
5904 instead of a normal tag name, a retry is done with a linear search.
5905 Tags in unsorted tags files, and matches with different case will only
5906 be found in the retry.
5907
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00005908 If a tag file indicates that it is case-fold sorted, the second,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005909 linear search can be avoided for the 'ignorecase' case. Use a value
5910 of '2' in the "!_TAG_FILE_SORTED" line for this. A tag file can be
5911 case-fold sorted with the -f switch to "sort" in most unices, as in
5912 the command: "sort -f -o tags tags". For "Exuberant ctags" version
5913 5.3 or higher the -f or --fold-case-sort switch can be used for this
5914 as well. Note that case must be folded to uppercase for this to work.
5915
5916 When 'tagbsearch' is off, tags searching is slower when a full match
5917 exists, but faster when no full match exists. Tags in unsorted tags
5918 files may only be found with 'tagbsearch' off.
5919 When the tags file is not sorted, or sorted in a wrong way (not on
5920 ASCII byte value), 'tagbsearch' should be off, or the line given above
5921 must be included in the tags file.
5922 This option doesn't affect commands that find all matching tags (e.g.,
5923 command-line completion and ":help").
5924 {Vi: always uses binary search in some versions}
5925
5926 *'taglength'* *'tl'*
5927'taglength' 'tl' number (default 0)
5928 global
5929 If non-zero, tags are significant up to this number of characters.
5930
5931 *'tagrelative'* *'tr'* *'notagrelative'* *'notr'*
5932'tagrelative' 'tr' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
5933 global
5934 {not in Vi}
5935 If on and using a tag file in another directory, file names in that
5936 tag file are relative to the directory where the tag file is.
5937 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
5938 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
5939
5940 *'tags'* *'tag'* *E433*
5941'tags' 'tag' string (default "./tags,tags", when compiled with
5942 |+emacs_tags|: "./tags,./TAGS,tags,TAGS")
5943 global or local to buffer |global-local|
5944 Filenames for the tag command, separated by spaces or commas. To
5945 include a space or comma in a file name, precede it with a backslash
5946 (see |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes).
5947 When a file name starts with "./", the '.' is replaced with the path
5948 of the current file. But only when the 'd' flag is not included in
5949 'cpoptions'. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. Also see
5950 |tags-option|.
5951 "*", "**" and other wildcards can be used to search for tags files in
5952 a directory tree. See |file-searching|. {not available when compiled
5953 without the |+path_extra| feature}
5954 If Vim was compiled with the |+emacs_tags| feature, Emacs-style tag
5955 files are also supported. They are automatically recognized. The
5956 default value becomes "./tags,./TAGS,tags,TAGS", unless case
5957 differences are ignored (MS-Windows). |emacs-tags|
5958 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
5959 file names from the list. This avoids problems when a future version
5960 uses another default.
5961 {Vi: default is "tags /usr/lib/tags"}
5962
5963 *'tagstack'* *'tgst'* *'notagstack'* *'notgst'*
5964'tagstack' 'tgst' boolean (default on)
5965 global
5966 {not in all versions of Vi}
5967 When on, the |tagstack| is used normally. When off, a ":tag" or
5968 ":tselect" command with an argument will not push the tag onto the
5969 tagstack. A following ":tag" without an argument, a ":pop" command or
5970 any other command that uses the tagstack will use the unmodified
5971 tagstack, but does change the pointer to the active entry.
5972 Resetting this option is useful when using a ":tag" command in a
5973 mapping which should not change the tagstack.
5974
5975 *'term'* *E529* *E530* *E531*
5976'term' string (default is $TERM, if that fails:
5977 in the GUI: "builtin_gui"
5978 on Amiga: "amiga"
5979 on BeOS: "beos-ansi"
5980 on Mac: "mac-ansi"
5981 on MiNT: "vt52"
5982 on MS-DOS: "pcterm"
5983 on OS/2: "os2ansi"
5984 on Unix: "ansi"
5985 on VMS: "ansi"
5986 on Win 32: "win32")
5987 global
5988 Name of the terminal. Used for choosing the terminal control
5989 characters. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
5990 For example: >
5991 :set term=$TERM
5992< See |termcap|.
5993
5994 *'termbidi'* *'tbidi'*
5995 *'notermbidi'* *'notbidi'*
5996'termbidi' 'tbidi' boolean (default off, on for "mlterm")
5997 global
5998 {not in Vi}
5999 {only available when compiled with the |+arabic|
6000 feature}
6001 The terminal is in charge of Bi-directionality of text (as specified
6002 by Unicode). The terminal is also expected to do the required shaping
6003 that some languages (such as Arabic) require.
6004 Setting this option implies that 'rightleft' will not be set when
6005 'arabic' is set and the value of 'arabicshape' will be ignored.
6006 Note that setting 'termbidi' has the immediate effect that
6007 'arabicshape' is ignored, but 'rightleft' isn't changed automatically.
6008 This option is reset when the GUI is started.
6009 For further details see |arabic.txt|.
6010
6011 *'termencoding'* *'tenc'*
6012'termencoding' 'tenc' string (default ""; with GTK+ 2 GUI: "utf-8"; with
6013 Macintosh GUI: "macroman")
6014 global
6015 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
6016 feature}
6017 {not in Vi}
6018 Encoding used for the terminal. This specifies what character
6019 encoding the keyboard produces and the display will understand. For
6020 the GUI it only applies to the keyboard ('encoding' is used for the
6021 display).
6022 In the Win32 console version the default value is the console codepage
6023 when it differs from the ANSI codepage.
6024 *E617*
6025 Note: This does not apply to the GTK+ 2 GUI. After the GUI has been
6026 successfully initialized, 'termencoding' is forcibly set to "utf-8".
6027 Any attempts to set a different value will be rejected, and an error
6028 message is shown.
6029 For the Win32 GUI 'termencoding' is not used for typed characters,
6030 because the Win32 system always passes Unicode characters.
6031 When empty, the same encoding is used as for the 'encoding' option.
6032 This is the normal value.
6033 Not all combinations for 'termencoding' and 'encoding' are valid. See
6034 |encoding-table|.
6035 The value for this option must be supported by internal conversions or
6036 iconv(). When this is not possible no conversion will be done and you
6037 will probably experience problems with non-ASCII characters.
6038 Example: You are working with the locale set to euc-jp (Japanese) and
6039 want to edit a UTF-8 file: >
6040 :let &termencoding = &encoding
6041 :set encoding=utf-8
6042< You need to do this when your system has no locale support for UTF-8.
6043
6044 *'terse'* *'noterse'*
6045'terse' boolean (default off)
6046 global
6047 When set: Add 's' flag to 'shortmess' option (this makes the message
6048 for a search that hits the start or end of the file not being
6049 displayed). When reset: Remove 's' flag from 'shortmess' option. {Vi
6050 shortens a lot of messages}
6051
6052 *'textauto'* *'ta'* *'notextauto'* *'nota'*
6053'textauto' 'ta' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
6054 global
6055 {not in Vi}
6056 This option is obsolete. Use 'fileformats'.
6057 For backwards compatibility, when 'textauto' is set, 'fileformats' is
6058 set to the default value for the current system. When 'textauto' is
6059 reset, 'fileformats' is made empty.
6060 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
6061 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
6062
6063 *'textmode'* *'tx'* *'notextmode'* *'notx'*
6064'textmode' 'tx' boolean (MS-DOS, Win32 and OS/2: default on,
6065 others: default off)
6066 local to buffer
6067 {not in Vi}
6068 This option is obsolete. Use 'fileformat'.
6069 For backwards compatibility, when 'textmode' is set, 'fileformat' is
6070 set to "dos". When 'textmode' is reset, 'fileformat' is set to
6071 "unix".
6072
6073 *'textwidth'* *'tw'*
6074'textwidth' 'tw' number (default 0)
6075 local to buffer
6076 {not in Vi}
6077 Maximum width of text that is being inserted. A longer line will be
6078 broken after white space to get this width. A zero value disables
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00006079 this. 'textwidth' is set to 0 when the 'paste' option is set. When
6080 'textwidth' is zero, 'wrapmargin' may be used. See also
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006081 'formatoptions' and |ins-textwidth|.
6082 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set.
6083
6084 *'thesaurus'* *'tsr'*
6085'thesaurus' 'tsr' string (default "")
6086 global or local to buffer |global-local|
6087 {not in Vi}
6088 List of file names, separated by commas, that are used to lookup words
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00006089 for thesaurus completion commands |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-T|. Each line in
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006090 the file should contain words with similar meaning, separated by
6091 non-keyword characters (white space is preferred). Maximum line
6092 length is 510 bytes.
6093 To obtain a file to be used here, check out the wordlist FAQ at
6094 http://www.hyphenologist.co.uk .
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00006095 To include a comma in a file name precede it with a backslash. Spaces
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006096 after a comma are ignored, otherwise spaces are included in the file
6097 name. See |option-backslash| about using backslashes.
6098 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
6099 directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version
6100 uses another default.
6101 Backticks cannot be used in this option for security reasons.
6102
6103 *'tildeop'* *'top'* *'notildeop'* *'notop'*
6104'tildeop' 'top' boolean (default off)
6105 global
6106 {not in Vi}
6107 When on: The tilde command "~" behaves like an operator.
6108 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
6109
6110 *'timeout'* *'to'* *'notimeout'* *'noto'*
6111'timeout' 'to' boolean (default on)
6112 global
6113 *'ttimeout'* *'nottimeout'*
6114'ttimeout' boolean (default off)
6115 global
6116 {not in Vi}
6117 These two options together determine the behavior when part of a
6118 mapped key sequence or keyboard code has been received:
6119
6120 'timeout' 'ttimeout' action ~
6121 off off do not time out
6122 on on or off time out on :mappings and key codes
6123 off on time out on key codes
6124
6125 If both options are off, Vim will wait until either the complete
6126 mapping or key sequence has been received, or it is clear that there
6127 is no mapping or key sequence for the received characters. For
6128 example: if you have mapped "vl" and Vim has received 'v', the next
6129 character is needed to see if the 'v' is followed by an 'l'.
6130 When one of the options is on, Vim will wait for about 1 second for
6131 the next character to arrive. After that the already received
6132 characters are interpreted as single characters. The waiting time can
6133 be changed with the 'timeoutlen' option.
6134 On slow terminals or very busy systems timing out may cause
6135 malfunctioning cursor keys. If both options are off, Vim waits
6136 forever after an entered <Esc> if there are key codes that start
6137 with <Esc>. You will have to type <Esc> twice. If you do not have
6138 problems with key codes, but would like to have :mapped key
6139 sequences not timing out in 1 second, set the 'ttimeout' option and
6140 reset the 'timeout' option.
6141
6142 NOTE: 'ttimeout' is reset when 'compatible' is set.
6143
6144 *'timeoutlen'* *'tm'*
6145'timeoutlen' 'tm' number (default 1000)
6146 global
6147 {not in all versions of Vi}
6148 *'ttimeoutlen'* *'ttm'*
6149'ttimeoutlen' 'ttm' number (default -1)
6150 global
6151 {not in Vi}
6152 The time in milliseconds that is waited for a key code or mapped key
6153 sequence to complete. Also used for CTRL-\ CTRL-N and CTRL-\ CTRL-G
6154 when part of a command has been typed.
6155 Normally only 'timeoutlen' is used and 'ttimeoutlen' is -1. When a
6156 different timeout value for key codes is desired set 'ttimeoutlen' to
6157 a non-negative number.
6158
6159 ttimeoutlen mapping delay key code delay ~
6160 < 0 'timeoutlen' 'timeoutlen'
6161 >= 0 'timeoutlen' 'ttimeoutlen'
6162
6163 The timeout only happens when the 'timeout' and 'ttimeout' options
6164 tell so. A useful setting would be >
6165 :set timeout timeoutlen=3000 ttimeoutlen=100
6166< (time out on mapping after three seconds, time out on key codes after
6167 a tenth of a second).
6168
6169 *'title'* *'notitle'*
6170'title' boolean (default off, on when title can be restored)
6171 global
6172 {not in Vi}
6173 {not available when compiled without the |+title|
6174 feature}
6175 When on, the title of the window will be set to the value of
6176 'titlestring' (if it is not empty), or to:
6177 filename [+=-] (path) - VIM
6178 Where:
6179 filename the name of the file being edited
6180 - indicates the file cannot be modified, 'ma' off
6181 + indicates the file was modified
6182 = indicates the file is read-only
6183 =+ indicates the file is read-only and modified
6184 (path) is the path of the file being edited
6185 - VIM the server name |v:servername| or "VIM"
6186 Only works if the terminal supports setting window titles
6187 (currently Amiga console, Win32 console, all GUI versions and
6188 terminals with a non- empty 't_ts' option - these are Unix xterm and
6189 iris-ansi by default, where 't_ts' is taken from the builtin termcap).
6190 *X11*
6191 When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original title will
6192 be restored if possible. The output of ":version" will include "+X11"
6193 when HAVE_X11 was defined, otherwise it will be "-X11". This also
6194 works for the icon name |'icon'|.
6195 But: When Vim was started with the |-X| argument, restoring the title
6196 will not work (except in the GUI).
6197 If the title cannot be restored, it is set to the value of 'titleold'.
6198 You might want to restore the title outside of Vim then.
6199 When using an xterm from a remote machine you can use this command:
6200 rsh machine_name xterm -display $DISPLAY &
6201 then the WINDOWID environment variable should be inherited and the
6202 title of the window should change back to what it should be after
6203 exiting Vim.
6204
6205 *'titlelen'*
6206'titlelen' number (default 85)
6207 global
6208 {not in Vi}
6209 {not available when compiled without the |+title|
6210 feature}
6211 Gives the percentage of 'columns' to use for the length of the window
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00006212 title. When the title is longer, only the end of the path name is
6213 shown. A '<' character before the path name is used to indicate this.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006214 Using a percentage makes this adapt to the width of the window. But
6215 it won't work perfectly, because the actual number of characters
6216 available also depends on the font used and other things in the title
6217 bar. When 'titlelen' is zero the full path is used. Otherwise,
6218 values from 1 to 30000 percent can be used.
6219 'titlelen' is also used for the 'titlestring' option.
6220
6221 *'titleold'*
6222'titleold' string (default "Thanks for flying Vim")
6223 global
6224 {not in Vi}
6225 {only available when compiled with the |+title|
6226 feature}
6227 This option will be used for the window title when exiting Vim if the
6228 original title cannot be restored. Only happens if 'title' is on or
6229 'titlestring' is not empty.
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +00006230 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
6231 security reasons.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006232 *'titlestring'*
6233'titlestring' string (default "")
6234 global
6235 {not in Vi}
6236 {not available when compiled without the |+title|
6237 feature}
6238 When this option is not empty, it will be used for the title of the
6239 window. This happens only when the 'title' option is on.
6240 Only works if the terminal supports setting window titles (currently
6241 Amiga console, Win32 console, all GUI versions and terminals with a
6242 non-empty 't_ts' option).
6243 When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original title will
6244 be restored if possible |X11|.
6245 When this option contains printf-style '%' items, they will be
6246 expanded according to the rules used for 'statusline'.
6247 Example: >
6248 :auto BufEnter * let &titlestring = hostname() . "/" . expand("%:p")
6249 :set title titlestring=%<%F%=%l/%L-%P titlelen=70
6250< The value of 'titlelen' is used to align items in the middle or right
6251 of the available space.
6252 Some people prefer to have the file name first: >
6253 :set titlestring=%t%(\ %M%)%(\ (%{expand(\"%:~:.:h\")})%)%(\ %a%)
6254< Note the use of "%{ }" and an expression to get the path of the file,
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00006255 without the file name. The "%( %)" constructs are used to add a
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006256 separating space only when needed.
6257 NOTE: Use of special characters in 'titlestring' may cause the display
6258 to be garbled (e.g., when it contains a CR or NL character).
6259 {not available when compiled without the |+statusline| feature}
6260
6261 *'toolbar'* *'tb'*
6262'toolbar' 'tb' string (default "icons,tooltips")
6263 global
6264 {only for |+GUI_GTK|, |+GUI_Athena|, |+GUI_Motif| and
6265 |+GUI_Photon|}
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00006266 The contents of this option controls various toolbar settings. The
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006267 possible values are:
6268 icons Toolbar buttons are shown with icons.
6269 text Toolbar buttons shown with text.
6270 horiz Icon and text of a toolbar button are
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00006271 horizontally arranged. {only in GTK+ 2 GUI}
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006272 tooltips Tooltips are active for toolbar buttons.
6273 Tooltips refer to the popup help text which appears after the mouse
6274 cursor is placed over a toolbar button for a brief moment.
6275
6276 If you want the toolbar to be shown with icons as well as text, do the
6277 following: >
6278 :set tb=icons,text
6279< Motif and Athena cannot display icons and text at the same time. They
6280 will show icons if both are requested.
6281
6282 If none of the strings specified in 'toolbar' are valid or if
6283 'toolbar' is empty, this option is ignored. If you want to disable
6284 the toolbar, you need to set the 'guioptions' option. For example: >
6285 :set guioptions-=T
6286< Also see |gui-toolbar|.
6287
6288 *'toolbariconsize'* *'tbis'*
6289'toolbariconsize' 'tbis' string (default "small")
6290 global
6291 {not in Vi}
6292 {only in the GTK+ 2 GUI}
6293 Controls the size of toolbar icons. The possible values are:
6294 tiny Use tiny toolbar icons.
6295 small Use small toolbar icons (default).
6296 medium Use medium-sized toolbar icons.
6297 large Use large toolbar icons.
6298 The exact dimensions in pixels of the various icon sizes depend on
6299 the current theme. Common dimensions are large=32x32, medium=24x24,
6300 small=20x20 and tiny=16x16.
6301
6302 If 'toolbariconsize' is empty, the global default size as determined
6303 by user preferences or the current theme is used.
6304
6305 *'ttybuiltin'* *'tbi'* *'nottybuiltin'* *'notbi'*
6306'ttybuiltin' 'tbi' boolean (default on)
6307 global
6308 {not in Vi}
6309 When on, the builtin termcaps are searched before the external ones.
6310 When off the builtin termcaps are searched after the external ones.
6311 When this option is changed, you should set the 'term' option next for
6312 the change to take effect, for example: >
6313 :set notbi term=$TERM
6314< See also |termcap|.
6315 Rationale: The default for this option is "on", because the builtin
6316 termcap entries are generally better (many systems contain faulty
6317 xterm entries...).
6318
6319 *'ttyfast'* *'tf'* *'nottyfast'* *'notf'*
6320'ttyfast' 'tf' boolean (default off, on when 'term' is xterm, hpterm,
6321 sun-cmd, screen, rxvt, dtterm or
6322 iris-ansi; also on when running Vim in
6323 a DOS console)
6324 global
6325 {not in Vi}
6326 Indicates a fast terminal connection. More characters will be sent to
6327 the screen for redrawing, instead of using insert/delete line
6328 commands. Improves smoothness of redrawing when there are multiple
6329 windows and the terminal does not support a scrolling region.
6330 Also enables the extra writing of characters at the end of each screen
6331 line for lines that wrap. This helps when using copy/paste with the
6332 mouse in an xterm and other terminals.
6333
6334 *'ttymouse'* *'ttym'*
6335'ttymouse' 'ttym' string (default depends on 'term')
6336 global
6337 {not in Vi}
6338 {only in Unix and VMS, doesn't work in the GUI; not
6339 available when compiled without |+mouse|}
6340 Name of the terminal type for which mouse codes are to be recognized.
6341 Currently these three strings are valid:
6342 *xterm-mouse*
6343 xterm xterm-like mouse handling. The mouse generates
6344 "<Esc>[Mscr", where "scr" is three bytes:
6345 "s" = button state
6346 "c" = column plus 33
6347 "r" = row plus 33
6348 xterm2 Works like "xterm", but with the xterm reporting the
6349 mouse position while the mouse is dragged. This works
6350 much faster and more precise. Your xterm must at
Bram Moolenaarbc7aa852005-03-06 23:38:09 +00006351 least at patchlevel 88 / XFree 3.3.3 for this to
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006352 work. See below for how Vim detects this
6353 automatically.
6354 *netterm-mouse*
6355 netterm NetTerm mouse handling. The mouse generates
6356 "<Esc>}r,c<CR>", where "r,c" are two decimal numbers
6357 for the row and column.
6358 *dec-mouse*
6359 dec DEC terminal mouse handling. The mouse generates a
6360 rather complex sequence, starting with "<Esc>[".
6361 *jsbterm-mouse*
6362 jsbterm JSB term mouse handling.
6363 *pterm-mouse*
6364 pterm QNX pterm mouse handling.
6365
6366 The mouse handling must be enabled at compile time |+mouse_xterm|
6367 |+mouse_dec| |+mouse_netterm|.
6368 Only "xterm"(2) is really recognized. NetTerm mouse codes are always
6369 recognized, if enabled at compile time. DEC terminal mouse codes
6370 are recognized if enabled at compile time, and 'ttymouse' is not
6371 "xterm" (because the xterm and dec mouse codes conflict).
6372 This option is automatically set to "xterm", when the 'term' option is
6373 set to a name that starts with "xterm", and 'ttymouse' is not "xterm"
6374 or "xterm2" already. The main use of this option is to set it to
6375 "xterm", when the terminal name doesn't start with "xterm", but it can
6376 handle xterm mouse codes.
6377 The "xterm2" value will be set if the xterm version is reported to be
6378 95 of higher. This only works when compiled with the |+termresponse|
6379 feature and if |t_RV| is set to the escape sequence to request the
6380 xterm version number. Otherwise "xterm2" must be set explicitly.
6381 If you do not want 'ttymouse' to be set to "xterm2" automatically, set
6382 t_RV to an empty string: >
6383 :set t_RV=
6384<
6385 *'ttyscroll'* *'tsl'*
6386'ttyscroll' 'tsl' number (default 999)
6387 global
6388 Maximum number of lines to scroll the screen. If there are more lines
6389 to scroll the window is redrawn. For terminals where scrolling is
6390 very slow and redrawing is not slow this can be set to a small number,
6391 e.g., 3, to speed up displaying.
6392
6393 *'ttytype'* *'tty'*
6394'ttytype' 'tty' string (default from $TERM)
6395 global
6396 Alias for 'term', see above.
6397
6398 *'undolevels'* *'ul'*
6399'undolevels' 'ul' number (default 100, 1000 for Unix, VMS,
6400 Win32 and OS/2)
6401 global
6402 {not in Vi}
6403 Maximum number of changes that can be undone. Since undo information
6404 is kept in memory, higher numbers will cause more memory to be used
6405 (nevertheless, a single change can use an unlimited amount of memory).
6406 Set to 0 for Vi compatibility: One level of undo and "u" undoes
6407 itself: >
6408 set ul=0
6409< But you can also get Vi compatibility by including the 'u' flag in
6410 'cpoptions', and still be able to use CTRL-R to repeat undo.
6411 Set to a negative number for no undo at all: >
6412 set ul=-1
6413< This helps when you run out of memory for a single change.
6414 Also see |undo-two-ways|.
6415
6416 *'updatecount'* *'uc'*
6417'updatecount' 'uc' number (default: 200)
6418 global
6419 {not in Vi}
6420 After typing this many characters the swap file will be written to
6421 disk. When zero, no swap file will be created at all (see chapter on
6422 recovery |crash-recovery|). 'updatecount' is set to zero by starting
6423 Vim with the "-n" option, see |startup|. When editing in readonly
6424 mode this option will be initialized to 10000.
6425 The swapfile can be disabled per buffer with |'swapfile'|.
6426 When 'updatecount' is set from zero to non-zero, swap files are
6427 created for all buffers that have 'swapfile' set. When 'updatecount'
6428 is set to zero, existing swap files are not deleted.
6429 Also see |'swapsync'|.
6430 This option has no meaning in buffers where |'buftype'| is "nofile"
6431 or "nowrite".
6432
6433 *'updatetime'* *'ut'*
6434'updatetime' 'ut' number (default 4000)
6435 global
6436 {not in Vi}
6437 If this many milliseconds nothing is typed the swap file will be
6438 written to disk (see |crash-recovery|). Also used for the
6439 |CursorHold| autocommand event.
6440
6441 *'verbose'* *'vbs'*
6442'verbose' 'vbs' number (default 0)
6443 global
6444 {not in Vi, although some versions have a boolean
6445 verbose option}
6446 When bigger than zero, Vim will give messages about what it is doing.
6447 Currently, these messages are given:
6448 >= 1 When the viminfo file is read or written.
6449 >= 2 When a file is ":source"'ed.
6450 >= 5 Every searched tags file.
6451 >= 8 Files for which a group of autocommands is executed.
6452 >= 9 Every executed autocommand.
6453 >= 12 Every executed function.
6454 >= 13 When an exception is thrown, caught, finished, or discarded.
6455 >= 14 Anything pending in a ":finally" clause.
6456 >= 15 Every executed Ex command (truncated at 200 characters).
6457
6458 This option can also be set with the "-V" argument. See |-V|.
6459 This option is also set by the |:verbose| command.
6460
6461 *'viewdir'* *'vdir'*
6462'viewdir' 'vdir' string (default for Amiga, MS-DOS, OS/2 and Win32:
6463 "$VIM/vimfiles/view",
6464 for Unix: "~/.vim/view",
6465 for Macintosh: "$VIM:vimfiles:view"
6466 for VMS: "sys$login:vimfiles/view"
6467 for RiscOS: "Choices:vimfiles/view")
6468 global
6469 {not in Vi}
6470 {not available when compiled without the +mksession
6471 feature}
6472 Name of the directory where to store files for |:mkview|.
6473 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
6474 security reasons.
6475
6476 *'viewoptions'* *'vop'*
6477'viewoptions' 'vop' string (default: "folds,options,cursor")
6478 global
6479 {not in Vi}
6480 {not available when compiled without the +mksession
6481 feature}
6482 Changes the effect of the |:mkview| command. It is a comma separated
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00006483 list of words. Each word enables saving and restoring something:
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006484 word save and restore ~
6485 cursor cursor position in file and in window
6486 folds manually created folds, opened/closed folds and local
6487 fold options
6488 options options and mappings local to a window or buffer (not
6489 global values for local options)
6490 slash backslashes in file names replaced with forward
6491 slashes
6492 unix with Unix end-of-line format (single <NL>), even when
6493 on Windows or DOS
6494
6495 "slash" and "unix" are useful on Windows when sharing view files
6496 with Unix. The Unix version of Vim cannot source dos format scripts,
6497 but the Windows version of Vim can source unix format scripts.
6498
6499 *'viminfo'* *'vi'* *E526* *E527* *E528*
6500'viminfo' 'vi' string (Vi default: "", Vim default for MS-DOS,
6501 Windows and OS/2: '20,<50,s10,h,rA:,rB:,
6502 for Amiga: '20,<50,s10,h,rdf0:,rdf1:,rdf2:
6503 for others: '20,<50,s10,h)
6504 global
6505 {not in Vi}
6506 {not available when compiled without the |+viminfo|
6507 feature}
6508 When non-empty, the viminfo file is read upon startup and written
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00006509 when exiting Vim (see |viminfo-file|). The string should be a comma
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006510 separated list of parameters, each consisting of a single character
6511 identifying the particular parameter, followed by a number or string
6512 which specifies the value of that parameter. If a particular
6513 character is left out, then the default value is used for that
6514 parameter. The following is a list of the identifying characters and
6515 the effect of their value.
6516 CHAR VALUE ~
6517 ! When included, save and restore global variables that start
6518 with an uppercase letter, and don't contain a lowercase
6519 letter. Thus "KEEPTHIS and "K_L_M" are stored, but "KeepThis"
Bram Moolenaar12805862005-01-05 22:16:17 +00006520 and "_K_L_M" are not. Only String and Number types are
6521 stored.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006522 " Maximum number of lines saved for each register. Old name of
6523 the '<' item, with the disadvantage that you need to put a
6524 backslash before the ", otherwise it will be recognized as the
6525 start of a comment!
6526 % When included, save and restore the buffer list. If Vim is
6527 started with a file name argument, the buffer list is not
6528 restored. If Vim is started without a file name argument, the
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00006529 buffer list is restored from the viminfo file. Buffers
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006530 without a file name and buffers for help files are not written
6531 to the viminfo file.
Bram Moolenaar15d0a8c2004-09-06 17:44:46 +00006532 When followed by a number, the number specifies the maximum
6533 number of buffers that are stored. Without a number all
6534 buffers are stored.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006535 ' Maximum number of previously edited files for which the marks
6536 are remembered. This parameter must always be included when
6537 'viminfo' is non-empty.
6538 Including this item also means that the |jumplist| and the
6539 |changelist| are stored in the viminfo file.
6540 / Maximum number of items in the search pattern history to be
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00006541 saved. If non-zero, then the previous search and substitute
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006542 patterns are also saved. When not included, the value of
6543 'history' is used.
6544 : Maximum number of items in the command-line history to be
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00006545 saved. When not included, the value of 'history' is used.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006546 < Maximum number of lines saved for each register. If zero then
6547 registers are not saved. When not included, all lines are
6548 saved. '"' is the old name for this item.
6549 Also see the 's' item below: limit specified in Kbyte.
6550 @ Maximum number of items in the input-line history to be
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00006551 saved. When not included, the value of 'history' is used.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006552 c When included, convert the text in the viminfo file from the
6553 'encoding' used when writing the file to the current
6554 'encoding'. See |viminfo-encoding|.
6555 f Whether file marks need to be stored. If zero, file marks ('0
6556 to '9, 'A to 'Z) are not stored. When not present or when
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00006557 non-zero, they are all stored. '0 is used for the current
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006558 cursor position (when exiting or when doing ":wviminfo").
6559 h Disable the effect of 'hlsearch' when loading the viminfo
6560 file. When not included, it depends on whether ":nohlsearch"
6561 has been used since the last search command.
6562 n Name of the viminfo file. The name must immediately follow
6563 the 'n'. Must be the last one! If the "-i" argument was
6564 given when starting Vim, that file name overrides the one
6565 given here with 'viminfo'. Environment variables are expanded
6566 when opening the file, not when setting the option.
6567 r Removable media. The argument is a string (up to the next
6568 ','). This parameter can be given several times. Each
6569 specifies the start of a path for which no marks will be
6570 stored. This is to avoid removable media. For MS-DOS you
6571 could use "ra:,rb:", for Amiga "rdf0:,rdf1:,rdf2:". You can
6572 also use it for temp files, e.g., for Unix: "r/tmp". Case is
6573 ignored. Maximum length of each 'r' argument is 50
6574 characters.
6575 s Maximum size of an item in Kbyte. If zero then registers are
6576 not saved. Currently only applies to registers. The default
6577 "s10" will exclude registers with more than 10 Kbyte of text.
6578 Also see the '<' item above: line count limit.
6579
6580 Example: >
6581 :set viminfo='50,<1000,s100,:0,n~/vim/viminfo
6582<
6583 '50 Marks will be remembered for the last 50 files you
6584 edited.
6585 <1000 Contents of registers (up to 1000 lines each) will be
6586 remembered.
6587 s100 Registers with more than 100 Kbyte text are skipped.
6588 :0 Command-line history will not be saved.
6589 n~/vim/viminfo The name of the file to use is "~/vim/viminfo".
6590 no / Since '/' is not specified, the default will be used,
6591 that is, save all of the search history, and also the
6592 previous search and substitute patterns.
6593 no % The buffer list will not be saved nor read back.
6594 no h 'hlsearch' highlighting will be restored.
6595
6596 When setting 'viminfo' from an empty value you can use |:rviminfo| to
6597 load the contents of the file, this is not done automatically.
6598
6599 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
6600 security reasons.
6601
6602 *'virtualedit'* *'ve'*
6603'virtualedit' 've' string (default "")
6604 global
6605 {not in Vi}
6606 {not available when compiled without the
6607 |+virtualedit| feature}
6608 A comma separated list of these words:
6609 block Allow virtual editing in Visual block mode.
6610 insert Allow virtual editing in Insert mode.
6611 all Allow virtual editing in all modes.
6612 Virtual editing means that the cursor can be positioned where there is
6613 no actual character. This can be halfway into a Tab or beyond the end
6614 of the line. Useful for selecting a rectangle in Visual mode and
6615 editing a table.
6616
6617 *'visualbell'* *'vb'* *'novisualbell'* *'novb'* *beep*
6618'visualbell' 'vb' boolean (default off)
6619 global
6620 {not in Vi}
6621 Use visual bell instead of beeping. The terminal code to display the
6622 visual bell is given with 't_vb'. When no beep or flash is wanted,
6623 use ":set vb t_vb=".
6624 Note: When the GUI starts, 't_vb' is reset to its default value. You
6625 might want to set it again in your |gvimrc|.
6626 In the GUI, 't_vb' defaults to "<Esc>|f", which inverts the display
6627 for 20 msec. If you want to use a different time, use "<Esc>|40f",
6628 where 40 is the time in msec.
6629 Does not work on the Amiga, you always get a screen flash.
6630 Also see 'errorbells'.
6631
6632 *'warn'* *'nowarn'*
6633'warn' boolean (default on)
6634 global
6635 Give a warning message when a shell command is used while the buffer
6636 has been changed.
6637
6638 *'weirdinvert'* *'wiv'* *'noweirdinvert'* *'nowiv'*
6639'weirdinvert' 'wiv' boolean (default off)
6640 global
6641 {not in Vi}
6642 This option has the same effect as the 't_xs' termcap option.
6643 It is provided for backwards compatibility with version 4.x.
6644 Setting 'weirdinvert' has the effect of making 't_xs' non-empty, and
6645 vice versa. Has no effect when the GUI is running.
6646
6647 *'whichwrap'* *'ww'*
6648'whichwrap' 'ww' string (Vim default: "b,s", Vi default: "")
6649 global
6650 {not in Vi}
6651 Allow specified keys that move the cursor left/right to move to the
6652 previous/next line when the cursor is on the first/last character in
6653 the line. Concatenate characters to allow this for these keys:
6654 char key mode ~
6655 b <BS> Normal and Visual
6656 s <Space> Normal and Visual
6657 h "h" Normal and Visual
6658 l "l" Normal and Visual
6659 < <Left> Normal and Visual
6660 > <Right> Normal and Visual
6661 ~ "~" Normal
6662 [ <Left> Insert and Replace
6663 ] <Right> Insert and Replace
6664 For example: >
6665 :set ww=<,>,[,]
6666< allows wrap only when cursor keys are used.
6667 When the movement keys are used in combination with a delete or change
6668 operator, the <EOL> also counts for a character. This makes "3h"
6669 different from "3dh" when the cursor crosses the end of a line. This
6670 is also true for "x" and "X", because they do the same as "dl" and
6671 "dh". If you use this, you may also want to use the mapping
6672 ":map <BS> X" to make backspace delete the character in front of the
6673 cursor.
6674 When 'l' is included, you get a side effect: "yl" on an empty line
6675 will include the <EOL>, so that "p" will insert a new line.
6676 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
6677 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
6678
6679 *'wildchar'* *'wc'*
6680'wildchar' 'wc' number (Vim default: <Tab>, Vi default: CTRL-E)
6681 global
6682 {not in Vi}
6683 Character you have to type to start wildcard expansion in the
6684 command-line, as specified with 'wildmode'.
6685 The character is not recognized when used inside a macro. See
6686 'wildcharm' for that.
6687 Although 'wc' is a number option, you can set it to a special key: >
6688 :set wc=<Esc>
6689< NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
6690 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
6691
6692 *'wildcharm'* *'wcm'*
6693'wildcharm' 'wcm' number (default: none (0))
6694 global
6695 {not in Vi}
6696 'wildcharm' works exactly like 'wildchar', except that it is
6697 recognized when used inside a macro. You can find "spare" command-line
6698 keys suitable for this option by looking at |ex-edit-index|. Normally
6699 you'll never actually type 'wildcharm', just use it in mappings that
6700 automatically invoke completion mode, e.g.: >
6701 :set wcm=<C-Z>
6702 :cmap ss so $vim/sessions/*.vim<C-Z>
6703< Then after typing :ss you can use CTRL-P & CTRL-N.
6704
6705 *'wildignore'* *'wig'*
6706'wildignore' 'wig' string (default "")
6707 global
6708 {not in Vi}
6709 {not available when compiled without the |+wildignore|
6710 feature}
6711 A list of file patterns. A file that matches with one of these
6712 patterns is ignored when completing file or directory names.
6713 The pattern is used like with |:autocmd|, see |autocmd-patterns|.
6714 Also see 'suffixes'.
6715 Example: >
6716 :set wildignore=*.o,*.obj
6717< The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
6718 a pattern from the list. This avoids problems when a future version
6719 uses another default.
6720
6721 *'wildmenu'* *'wmnu'* *'nowildmenu'* *'nowmnu'*
6722'wildmenu' 'wmnu' boolean (default off)
6723 global
6724 {not in Vi}
6725 {not available if compiled without the |+wildmenu|
6726 feature}
6727 When 'wildmenu' is on, command-line completion operates in an enhanced
6728 mode. On pressing 'wildchar' (usually <Tab>) to invoke completion,
6729 the possible matches are shown just above the command line, with the
6730 first match highlighted (overwriting the status line, if there is
6731 one). Keys that show the previous/next match, such as <Tab> or
6732 CTRL-P/CTRL-N, cause the highlight to move to the appropriate match.
6733 When 'wildmode' is used, "wildmenu" mode is used where "full" is
6734 specified. "longest" and "list" do not start "wildmenu" mode.
6735 If there are more matches than can fit in the line, a ">" is shown on
6736 the right and/or a "<" is shown on the left. The status line scrolls
6737 as needed.
6738 The "wildmenu" mode is abandoned when a key is hit that is not used
6739 for selecting a completion.
6740 While the "wildmenu" is active the following keys have special
6741 meanings:
6742
6743 <Left> <Right> - select previous/next match (like CTRL-P/CTRL-N)
6744 <Down> - in filename/menu name completion: move into a
6745 subdirectory or submenu.
6746 <CR> - in menu completion, when the cursor is just after a
6747 dot: move into a submenu.
6748 <Up> - in filename/menu name completion: move up into
6749 parent directory or parent menu.
6750
6751 This makes the menus accessible from the console |console-menus|.
6752
6753 If you prefer the <Left> and <Right> keys to move the cursor instead
6754 of selecting a different match, use this: >
6755 :cnoremap <Left> <Space><BS><Left>
6756 :cnoremap <Right> <Space><BS><Right>
6757<
6758 The "WildMenu" highlighting is used for displaying the current match
6759 |hl-WildMenu|.
6760
6761 *'wildmode'* *'wim'*
6762'wildmode' 'wim' string (Vim default: "full")
6763 global
6764 {not in Vi}
6765 Completion mode that is used for the character specified with
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00006766 'wildchar'. It is a comma separated list of up to four parts. Each
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006767 part specifies what to do for each consecutive use of 'wildchar. The
6768 first part specifies the behavior for the first use of 'wildchar',
6769 The second part for the second use, etc.
6770 These are the possible values for each part:
6771 "" Complete only the first match.
6772 "full" Complete the next full match. After the last match,
6773 the original string is used and then the first match
6774 again.
6775 "longest" Complete till longest common string. If this doesn't
6776 result in a longer string, use the next part.
6777 "longest:full" Like "longest", but also start 'wildmenu' if it is
6778 enabled.
6779 "list" When more than one match, list all matches.
6780 "list:full" When more than one match, list all matches and
6781 complete first match.
6782 "list:longest" When more than one match, list all matches and
6783 complete till longest common string.
6784 When there is only a single match, it is fully completed in all cases.
6785
6786 Examples: >
6787 :set wildmode=full
6788< Complete first full match, next match, etc. (the default) >
6789 :set wildmode=longest,full
6790< Complete longest common string, then each full match >
6791 :set wildmode=list:full
6792< List all matches and complete each full match >
6793 :set wildmode=list,full
6794< List all matches without completing, then each full match >
6795 :set wildmode=longest,list
6796< Complete longest common string, then list alternatives.
6797
Bram Moolenaarb5bf5b82004-12-24 14:35:23 +00006798 *'wildoptions'* *'wop'*
6799'wildoptions' 'wop' string (default "")
6800 global
6801 {not in Vi}
6802 {not available when compiled without the |+wildignore|
6803 feature}
6804 A list of words that change how command line completion is done.
6805 Currently only one word is allowed:
6806 tagfile When using CTRL-D to list matching tags, the kind of
6807 tag and the file of the tag is listed. Only one match
6808 is displayed per line. Often used tag kinds are:
6809 d #define
6810 f function
6811 Also see |cmdline-completion|.
6812
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006813 *'winaltkeys'* *'wak'*
6814'winaltkeys' 'wak' string (default "menu")
6815 global
6816 {not in Vi}
6817 {only used in Win32, Motif, GTK and Photon GUI}
6818 Some GUI versions allow the access to menu entries by using the ALT
6819 key in combination with a character that appears underlined in the
6820 menu. This conflicts with the use of the ALT key for mappings and
6821 entering special characters. This option tells what to do:
6822 no Don't use ALT keys for menus. ALT key combinations can be
6823 mapped, but there is no automatic handling. This can then be
6824 done with the |:simalt| command.
6825 yes ALT key handling is done by the windowing system. ALT key
6826 combinations cannot be mapped.
6827 menu Using ALT in combination with a character that is a menu
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00006828 shortcut key, will be handled by the windowing system. Other
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006829 keys can be mapped.
6830 If the menu is disabled by excluding 'm' from 'guioptions', the ALT
6831 key is never used for the menu.
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +00006832 This option is not used for <F10>; on Win32 and with GTK <F10> will
6833 select the menu, unless it has been mapped.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006834
Bram Moolenaar4399ef42005-02-12 14:29:27 +00006835 *'window'* *'wi'*
6836'window' 'wi' number (default screen height - 1)
6837 global
6838 Window height. Do not confuse this with the height of the Vim window,
6839 use 'lines' for that.
Bram Moolenaar19a09a12005-03-04 23:39:37 +00006840 Used for |CTRL-F| and |CTRL-B| when there is only one window and the
6841 value is smaller than 'lines' minus one. The screen will scroll
6842 'window' minus two lines, with a minimum of one.
Bram Moolenaar4399ef42005-02-12 14:29:27 +00006843 When 'window' is equal to 'lines' minus one CTRL-F and CTRL-B scroll
6844 in a much smarter way, taking care of wrapping lines.
6845 When resizing the Vim window, the value is smaller than 1 or more than
6846 or equal to 'lines' it will be set to 'lines' minus 1.
6847 {Vi also uses the option to specify the number of displayed lines}
6848
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006849 *'winheight'* *'wh'* *E591*
6850'winheight' 'wh' number (default 1)
6851 global
6852 {not in Vi}
6853 {not available when compiled without the +windows
6854 feature}
6855 Minimal number of lines for the current window. This is not a hard
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00006856 minimum, Vim will use fewer lines if there is not enough room. If the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006857 current window is smaller, its size is increased, at the cost of the
6858 height of other windows. Set it to 999 to make the current window
6859 always fill the screen (although this has the drawback that ":all"
6860 will create only two windows). Set it to a small number for normal
6861 editing.
6862 Minimum value is 1.
6863 The height is not adjusted after one of the commands to change the
6864 height of the current window.
6865 'winheight' applies to the current window. Use 'winminheight' to set
6866 the minimal height for other windows.
6867
6868 *'winfixheight'* *'wfh'* *'nowinfixheight'* *'nowfh'*
6869'winfixheight' 'wfh' boolean (default off)
6870 local to window
6871 {not in Vi}
6872 {not available when compiled without the +windows
6873 feature}
6874 Keep the window height when windows are opened or closed and
6875 'equalalways' is set. Set by default for the |preview-window| and
6876 |quickfix-window|.
6877 The height may be changed anyway when running out of room.
6878
6879 *'winminheight'* *'wmh'*
6880'winminheight' 'wmh' number (default 1)
6881 global
6882 {not in Vi}
6883 {not available when compiled without the +windows
6884 feature}
6885 The minimal height of a window, when it's not the current window.
6886 This is a hard minimum, windows will never become smaller.
6887 When set to zero, windows may be "squashed" to zero lines (i.e. just a
6888 status bar) if necessary. They will return to at least one line when
6889 they become active (since the cursor has to have somewhere to go.)
6890 Use 'winheight' to set the minimal height of the current window.
6891 This option is only checked when making a window smaller. Don't use a
6892 large number, it will cause errors when opening more than a few
6893 windows. A value of 0 to 3 is reasonable.
6894
6895 *'winminwidth'* *'wmw'*
6896'winminwidth' 'wmw' number (default 1)
6897 global
6898 {not in Vi}
6899 {not available when compiled without the +vertsplit
6900 feature}
6901 The minimal width of a window, when it's not the current window.
6902 This is a hard minimum, windows will never become smaller.
6903 When set to zero, windows may be "squashed" to zero columns (i.e. just
6904 a vertical separator) if necessary. They will return to at least one
6905 line when they become active (since the cursor has to have somewhere
6906 to go.)
6907 Use 'winwidth' to set the minimal width of the current window.
6908 This option is only checked when making a window smaller. Don't use a
6909 large number, it will cause errors when opening more than a few
6910 windows. A value of 0 to 12 is reasonable.
6911
6912 *'winwidth'* *'wiw'* *E592*
6913'winwidth' 'wiw' number (default 20)
6914 global
6915 {not in Vi}
6916 {not available when compiled without the +vertsplit
6917 feature}
6918 Minimal number of columns for the current window. This is not a hard
6919 minimum, Vim will use fewer columns if there is not enough room. If
6920 the current window is smaller, its size is increased, at the cost of
6921 the width of other windows. Set it to 999 to make the current window
6922 always fill the screen. Set it to a small number for normal editing.
6923 The width is not adjusted after one of the commands to change the
6924 width of the current window.
6925 'winwidth' applies to the current window. Use 'winminwidth' to set
6926 the minimal width for other windows.
6927
6928 *'wrap'* *'nowrap'*
6929'wrap' boolean (default on)
6930 local to window
6931 {not in Vi}
6932 This option changes how text is displayed. It doesn't change the text
6933 in the buffer, see 'textwidth' for that.
6934 When on, lines longer than the width of the window will wrap and
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00006935 displaying continues on the next line. When off lines will not wrap
6936 and only part of long lines will be displayed. When the cursor is
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006937 moved to a part that is not shown, the screen will scroll
6938 horizontally.
6939 The line will be broken in the middle of a word if necessary. See
6940 'linebreak' to get the break at a word boundary.
6941 To make scrolling horizontally a bit more useful, try this: >
6942 :set sidescroll=5
6943 :set listchars+=precedes:<,extends:>
6944< See 'sidescroll', 'listchars' and |wrap-off|.
6945
6946 *'wrapmargin'* *'wm'*
6947'wrapmargin' 'wm' number (default 0)
6948 local to buffer
6949 Number of characters from the right window border where wrapping
6950 starts. When typing text beyond this limit, an <EOL> will be inserted
6951 and inserting continues on the next line.
6952 Options that add a margin, such as 'number' and 'foldcolumn', cause
6953 the text width to be further reduced. This is Vi compatible.
6954 When 'textwidth' is non-zero, this option is not used.
6955 See also 'formatoptions' and |ins-textwidth|. {Vi: works differently
6956 and less usefully}
6957
6958 *'wrapscan'* *'ws'* *'nowrapscan'* *'nows'*
6959'wrapscan' 'ws' boolean (default on) *E384* *E385*
6960 global
6961 Searches wrap around the end of the file.
6962
6963 *'write'* *'nowrite'*
6964'write' boolean (default on)
6965 global
6966 {not in Vi}
6967 Allows writing files. When not set, writing a file is not allowed.
6968 Can be used for a view-only mode, where modifications to the text are
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00006969 still allowed. Can be reset with the |-m| or |-M| command line
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006970 argument. Filtering text is still possible, even though this requires
6971 writing a temporary file.
6972
6973 *'writeany'* *'wa'* *'nowriteany'* *'nowa'*
6974'writeany' 'wa' boolean (default off)
6975 global
6976 Allows writing to any file with no need for "!" override.
6977
6978 *'writebackup'* *'wb'* *'nowritebackup'* *'nowb'*
6979'writebackup' 'wb' boolean (default on with |+writebackup| feature, off
6980 otherwise)
6981 global
6982 {not in Vi}
6983 Make a backup before overwriting a file. The backup is removed after
6984 the file was successfully written, unless the 'backup' option is
6985 also on. Reset this option if your file system is almost full. See
6986 |backup-table| for another explanation.
6987 When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a backup is not made anyway.
6988 NOTE: This option is set to the default value when 'compatible' is
6989 set.
6990
6991 *'writedelay'* *'wd'*
6992'writedelay' 'wd' number (default 0)
6993 global
6994 {not in Vi}
6995 The number of microseconds to wait for each character sent to the
6996 screen. When non-zero, characters are sent to the terminal one by
6997 one. For MS-DOS pcterm this does not work. For debugging purposes.
6998
6999 vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl: